all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Revised Users Manual1 | Users Manual | 2.90 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Revised Users Manual2 | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.69 MiB | ||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) |
1 2 | Revised Users Manual1 | Users Manual | 2.90 MiB |
P Series.book Page 1 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Copyright & Trademark Information C o p y r i g h t Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. However, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LifeBook are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. Microsoft, MS-DOS, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Atheros and Super AG are registered trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other coun-
tries. Realtek is a trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corpo-
ration. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2005 Fujitsu Computer Systems Corpora-
tion. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu Computer Systems Corpora-
tion. No part of this publication may be stored or trans-
mitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation. B6FH-6861-01EN-00 WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:
Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation Address:
1250 E. Arques Avenue, MS 122 Sunnyvale, CA 94085 Telephone:
(408) 746-6000 Declares that product:
Model Configuration:
LifeBook P1510D Notebook Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. P Series.book Page 2 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS For Authorized Repair Technicians Only Danger of explosion if Lithium (clock) bat-
tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recom-
mended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufac-
turers instruction. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating fuse. System Disposal LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT Hg CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL LAWS. This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed Class 2 Adapters with an output rating of 16 VDC, with a current of 2.5 A. AC adapter output polarity:
When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using the modem during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use the modem to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication Line Cord. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS P Series.book Page 3 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s Fujitsu LifeBook P Series Notebook Table of Contents 1 PREFACE Preface About This Guide . 3 Fujitsu Contact Information . 3 Warranty . 3 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR LIFEBOOK Overview Unpacking . 7 Optional Accessories . 7 Locating the Controls/Connectors Front and Display Components . 9 Left-Side Panel Components . 10 Right-Side Panel Components . 11 Rear Panel Components . 12 Bottom Components . 13 Status Indicators Power Indicator . 14 AC Adapter/Battery Charging Indicator . 14 Battery Level Indicator . 14 Hard Drive Access Indicator . 14 NumLk Indicator. 15 CapsLock Indicator . 15 ScrLk Indicator . 15 Display Panel Opening the Display Panel . 16 Using the System as a Tablet . 16 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 17 Keyboard Using the Keyboard . 18 Numeric Keypad. 18 Windows Keys . 18 Cursor Keys . 18 Function Keys. 19 LifeBook Application Panel Changing Button Functions . 21 Quick Point/Touch Screen Clicking . 22 Double-Clicking . 22 Dragging . 22 Quick Point Control Adjustment. 23 Touch Screen . 23 Volume Control Controlling the Volume . 25 3 USING YOUR LIFEBOOK Power Sources Connecting the Power Adapters . 29 Starting Your LifeBook Power On. 30 Boot Sequence . 30 BIOS Setup Utility. 30 Booting the System . 31 Registering Your LifeBook notebook. 31 Installing Click Me!. 31 Power Management Suspend/Resume Button . 32 Standby Mode . 32 Hibernate Mode . 33 Display Timeout . 33 P Series.book Page 4 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s Hard Disk Timeout . 33 Windows Power Management . 33 Restarting the System. 33 Power Off . 34 4 USER-INSTALLABLE FEATURES Lithium ion Battery Recharging the Battery. 37 Replacing the Battery . 38 Memory Upgrade Module Installing Memory Upgrade Modules . 39 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . 39 Checking the Memory Capacity . 40 Secure Digital Media Inserting SD Cards . 41 Removing An SD Card . 41 Compact Flash Cards Inserting Compact Flash Cards . 42 Removing Compact Flash Cards. 43 Port Replicator Port Replicator Components. 44 Attaching Port Replicator . 44 Detaching Port Replicator. 44 Device Ports Modem (RJ-11) Jack . 46 Internal LAN (RJ-45) jack . 46 Docking Port . 46 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 46 Microphone Jack . 46 Headphone Jack. 46 External Video Port . 47 5 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Identifying the Problem . 51 Specific Problems . 51 Troubleshooting Table . 52 Power On Self Test Messages . 58 Modem Result Codes. 59 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Restoring the Factory Image . 60 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates. 61 6 CARING FOR YOUR LIFEBOOK Care and Maintenance LifeBook P Series notebook . 65 Keyboard . 66 Batteries. 66 Floppy Disk Drive and Floppy Disks . 66 Optional Optical Drive and Discs . 67 CF Cards . 67 7 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Configuration Label . 71 Physical Specifications . 71 Processing Specifications . 71 Memory/Storage Specifications . 71 Display Specifications. 71 Interface Specifications . 71 Power Specifications . 72 Environmental Specifications . 72 Agency Approval Specifications . 72 Additional Specifications . 72 Regulatory Information . 73 8 GLOSSARY Glossary. 77 P Series.book Page 5 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s APPENDIX A: INTEGRATED WIRELESS LAN USERS GUIDE Before Using the Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device. 86 Wireless Network Considerations . 87 Deactivating the WLAN Device . 87 Activating the WLAN Device . 88 Configuration of the WLAN Device Flow of Operations. 89 Configuration Using Atheros Client Utility . 89 Connection to the network. 90 Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Table . 93 Wireless LAN Glossary Glossary . 94 IP address information About IP Addresses . 96 WLAN Specifications Specifications . 97 APPENDIX B: USING THE FINGERPRINT SWIPE SENSOR Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 101 Getting Started. 101 Installing OmniPass . 101 User Enrollment . 102 Using OmniPass . 103 Configuring OmniPass . 105 OmniPass Control Center . 106 Troubleshooting . 107 P Series.book Page 6 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s P Series.book Page 1 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 1 Preface 1 P Series.book Page 2 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k 2 P Series.book Page 3 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Preface ABOUT THIS GUIDE The LifeBook P Series notebook from Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation is a small yet powerful convertible computer. It can be used either as a standard notebook using keyboard input, or in tablet configura-
tion using pen input. It is powered by an Intel Pentium M microprocessor, has a built-in color display with a passive digitizer, and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a versatile portable environment. This manual explains how to operate your LifeBook P Series notebooks hardware and built-in system soft-
ware. Your notebook comes with the Windows XP operating system pre-installed. Your LifeBook P Series notebook is a completely self-
contained unit with an active-matrix (TFT) color LCD display. The notebook has a powerful interface that enables it to support a variety of optional features. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard keys appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [Esc], [Enter] and [Ctrl]. P r e f a c e FUJITSU CONTACT INFORMATION Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Computer Systems Service and Support the following ways:
Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Fax: 1-408-764-2724 E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com Web site:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Online You can go directly to the online Fujitsu Product catalog for your notebook. Go to Start -> Fujitsu Weblinks ->
LifeBook Accessories. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. Example: (See page xx.) You can also reach Fujitsu Service and Support online by going to Start -> Fujitsu Weblinks -> Fujitsu Service and Support. You must have an active internet connection to use the online URL links. WARRANTY Your LifeBook P Series notebook is backed by an International Limited Warranty and includes toll-free technical support. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for warranty terms and conditions. On screen buttons or menu items appear in bold. Example: Click OK to restart your notebook. DOS commands you enter appear in Courier type. Example: Shutdown the computer?
The information icon highlights information that will enhance your understanding of the subject material. The caution icon highlights information that is important to the safe operation of your computer, or to the integrity of your files. Please read all caution information carefully. The warning icon warns you about possible hazards that can occur to you, your system, or your files. Please read all warning information carefully. 3 P Series.book Page 4 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k 4 P Series.book Page 5 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 2 Getting to Know Your LifeBook 5 P Series.book Page 6 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o 6 P Series.book Page 7 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C Overview Figure 2-1. Fujitsu LifeBook P Series notebook This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LifeBook P Series notebook. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your notebook, even if you are already familiar with mobile computers. UNPACKING When you receive your LifeBook P Series notebook, unpack it carefully, and compare the parts you have received with the items listed below. For a pre-configured model you should have:
LifeBook P Series notebook (Figure 2-1) AC adapter with AC power cord (Figure 2-2) Phone/Modem (RJ-11) telephone cable Pen Pen tether Driver and Application Restore (DAR) CD Recovery CD Third-party Application CD Getting Started Guide Users Guide (this document) International Limited Warranty Booklet Certificate of Authenticity Lithium ion battery (pre-installed) You may also have one or more of the following devices in the box, depending upon the configuration of your system:
Port Replicator (Figure 2-3) External USB Floppy Disk Drive Additional battery(s) Application CD(s) for third-party software Figure 2-2. AC Adapter Figure 2-3. Optional Port Replicator OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES A variety of optional accessories is available for use with your LifeBook P Series notebook. For the latest list of accessories available, be sure to frequently check the Fujitsu Web site at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Refer to the instructions provided with these accessories for details on their use. 7 P Series.book Page 8 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Locating the Controls and Connectors Connectors and peripheral interfaces on the LifeBook P Series notebook and the optional port replicator allow you to connect a variety of devices. Specific locations are illustrated in Figures 2-4 through 2-8. The table below provides a short description of each icon on the Life-
Book P Series notebook. Each of the icons is either molded into or printed on the notebook chassis. Connection DC in connector Secure Digital
(SD) Slot LifeBook Icon Purpose Connect an external power source such as the AC adapter or auto/airline adapter. The Secure Digital (SD) card slot allows you to install a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. USB Ports Connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 or 1.1 compliant devices to the notebook. Microphone Jack Fingerprint Sensor Headphone Jack Modem Port Replicator Security lock slot Suspend/Resume button Local Area Network (LAN) Battery Release Latch Wireless LAN On-Off Switch Display Rotation 8 Connect an external microphone. The internal microphone is disabled when you plug in an external microphone. Use the fingerprint sensor to log onto the system using your fingerprint as the
"password". Connect stereo headphones or powered external speakers. The internal speaker is disabled when you plug in external headphones or powered speakers. Connect a telephone line to the internal modem using a standard RJ-11 telephone plug. Connect the notebook port replicator or other approved docking device. Refer to documentation accompanying the dock for more information. The security slot allows you to secure the notebook using notebook locking devices. The Suspend/Resume button allows you to suspend notebook activity without powering off, resume from suspend mode, and power on the system when it has been shut down from Windows. The LAN (RJ-45) jack is used to connect the internal 10/100 Base-T/Tx Ethernet to a Local Area Network (LAN) in your office or home, or broadband devices such as a cable modem, DSL, or satellite Internet. The battery release latch allows you to remove the battery from your system for storage or replacement. The wireless LAN switch allows you to turn power to the optional wireless LAN device on and off. This icon indicates the direction in which the display should be rotated when converting to tablet mode. Table 2-1. System icons P Series.book Page 9 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C Latch Display Panel Fingerprint Sensor LifeBook Application Buttons Status Indicator Panel Suspend/
Resume Button Built-in Microphone Touchpad Pointing Device (in front of keyboard) Rotation Hinge Figure 2-4. LifeBook P Series notebook with display open FRONT AND DISPLAY COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of the front and display features of the LifeBook P Series notebook.
(Figure 2-4) Display Panel Latch The display panel latch holds the display panel in posi-
tion. Display Panel The display panel is a color LCD panel with back lighting for the display of text and graphics and touch screen functionality. Built-in Microphone The built-in microphone allows you to input mono audio. LifeBook Application Buttons The LifeBook P Series notebook Application Buttons provide application launch capabilities. See LifeBook Application Panel on page 20. Suspend/Resume Button The Suspend/Resume button allows you to suspend notebook activity without powering off, resume your notebook from standby mode, and power on your system when it has been shut down from the Windows operating system. See Power On on page 30. Keyboard A full-function keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. See Keyboard on page 18. Touchpad Pointing Device The Touchpad pointing device consists of two mouse-
like buttons and one scroll button. See Quick Point Pointing Device/Touch Screen on page 22. Rotation Hinge The rotation hinge allows you to transform your computer from a notebook configuration into a tablet configuration. See Using the System as a Tablet on page 16. Fingerprint Sensor The optional fingerprint recognition sensor allows you to start your system by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 101. Status Indicator Panel The Status Indicator Panel displays symbols that corre-
spond to specific components of your LifeBook P Series notebook. See Status Indicators on page 14. 9 P Series.book Page 10 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Microphone Jack Compact Flash Card Slot USB 2.0 Port Headphone Jack Compact Flash Card Eject Button Figure 2-5. LifeBook P Series notebook left-side panel LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS Following is a brief description of your notebooks left-
side components. (Figure 2-5) USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allow you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 46. Compact Flash Card Slot The Compact Flash (CF) Card Slot allows you to insert a CF Card. The CF Card Eject Button is used when ejecting a CF Card from the slot. See Inserting Compact Flash Cards on page 42. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external mono microphone. See Microphone Jack on page 46. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect stereo head-
phones or powered external speakers. See Headphone Jack on page 46. 10 P Series.book Page 11 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C Pen/Pen Holder Secure Digital (SD) Card Slot WLAN On/Off Switch USB 2.0 Port DC Power Jack Figure 2-6. LifeBook P Series notebook right-side panel RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS Following is a brief description of your notebooks right-
side components. Pen/Pen Holder The pen is used as the interface with the digitizer display. WLAN On/Off Switch The wireless LAN On/Off Switch is used to power off the wireless antenna when not in use. SD Card The Secure Digital (SD) card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allow you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 46. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter or the optional Auto/Airline adapter to power your notebook and charge the internal Lithium ion Battery. 11 P Series.book Page 12 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o External Video Port
(behind cover) Modem (RJ-11) Port LAN (RJ-45) Port Anti-theft Lock Slot Air Vents Figure 2-7. LifeBook P Series notebook rear panel Air Vents The air vents allow proper air circulation to ensure that the notebook does not overheat. To protect your notebook from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the notebook in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. REAR PANEL COMPONENTS Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Port The Modem (RJ-11) telephone port is for attaching a telephone line to the internal multinational 56K modem. The internal multinational modem is not intended for use with Digital PBX systems. Do not connect the internal modem to a Digital PBX as it may cause serious damage to the internal modem or your entire LifeBook P Series notebook. Consult your PBX manufacturers documentation for details. Some hotels have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find out BEFORE you connect your modem. The internal modem is designed to the ITU-T V.90 standard. Its maximum speed of 53000 bps is the highest allowed by FCC, and its actual connection rate depends on the line conditions. The maximum speed is 33600 bps at upload. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach a optional physical lock-down device. LAN (RJ-45) Port The internal LAN (RJ-45) port is used for an internal 10/
100Base-Tx Ethernet. See Internal LAN (RJ-45) jack on page 46. External Video Port The external video port allows you to connect an external CRT monitor or LCD projector. Note that when the optional Port Replicator is attached to the system, you must use the external video port on the Port Repli-
cator rather than the port on the system. See External Video Port on page 47. 12 P Series.book Page 13 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C Speaker Port Replicator Connector Air Vents Battery Pack Latch Lithium ion Battery Main Unit and Configuration Label (approximate location) Air Vents Memory Upgrade Compartment Battery Pack Latch Figure 2-8. LifeBook P Series notebook bottom panel compartment allows you to expand the system memory capacity of your notebook, hence improving overall performance. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 39. Air Vents The air vents allow proper air circulation to ensure that the notebook does not overheat. To protect your notebook from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the notebook in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. BOTTOM COMPONENTS Following is a brief description of your notebooks bottom panel components. (Figure 2-8) Lithium ion Battery Compartment The battery compartment contains the internal Lithium ion battery. The battery should be removed when the computer is stored over a long period of time or for swapping a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery. See Lithium ion Battery on page 37. Port Replicator Connector This connector allows you to connect the optional port replicator. Speaker The speaker allows you to listen to sound from your system. Main Unit and Configuration Label The configuration label shows the model number and other information about your LifeBook P Series note-
book. In addition, the configuration portion of the label has the serial number and manufacturer information that you will need to give your support representative. It identifies the exact version of various components of your notebook. Memory Upgrade Compartment Your notebook comes with high speed DDR2 Synchro-
nous Dynamic RAM (SDRAM). The memory upgrade 13 P Series.book Page 14 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o AC Adapter/
Charging Hard Drive Access Battery Level Power Button/
Indicator NumLk ScrLk CapsLk Figure 2-9. Status Indicators Status Indicators The status indicators display symbols that correspond to specific components of your notebook. (Figure 2-9) The symbols show how each of those components is oper-
ating. Note that keyboard-related indicators (CapsLk, NumLk, ScrLk) are located above the keyboard. POWER INDICATOR The Power indicator symbol located on the power button shows whether your system is operational. When it is lit blue, it means that there is power to your note-
book and that it is ready for use. AC ADAPTER/BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR The AC Adapter/Battery Charging indicator shows that your notebook is operating from the AC adapter or an auto/airline adapter. This icon has two different states that can tell you the battery charge status. Green: This means that a power adapter is currently in use and the battery is not charging. Amber: This means that a power adapter is currently in use and the battery is charging. BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR The Battery Level indicators shows whether the Lithium ion battery is installed and charging, and how much charge is available within the batteries. Green: The battery is installed and fully charged. Amber: The battery is installed and is approximately half charged. Red: The battery charge is low and it should be charged with an adapter or replaced with a charged battery. Batteries subjected to shocks, vibration or extreme temperatures can be permanently damaged. If there is no battery activity and the power adapters are not connected, the Battery Level indicators will also be off. HARD DRIVE ACCESS INDICATOR The Hard Drive Access indicator lights green when your internal hard drive is being accessed. 14 P Series.book Page 15 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C NUMLK INDICATOR The NumLk indicator shows that the integral keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode. CAPSLOCK INDICATOR The CapsLock indicator shows that your keyboard is set to type in all capital letters. SCRLK INDICATOR The ScrLk indicator shows that your scroll lock is active. 15 P Series.book Page 16 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Latch Latch Slot Display Cover Figure 2-10. Opening the display 4. Push the latch towards the display (See A in Figure 2-11). The latch will click twice and the top latch disappears, and the bottom latch appears (See B in Figure 2-11). Lay the display flush against the system so that the latch rests in the slot in the battery pack. You can now use the system as a tablet.
(Figure 2-15) Top latch A Display Side Bottom latch B Figure 2-11. Using the Display Latch 5. To return the system to notebook configuration, repeat step 3 and 2. Be sure to turn the display in the opposite direction when performing step 2. Display Panel The convertible design of your LifeBook P Series note-
book allows you to open the display fully, rotate it 180 degrees, and lay it face up on the keyboard. This allows you to use the system as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. OPENING THE DISPLAY PANEL Lift the display cover backwards, being careful not to touch the screen, until it is at a comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 2-10) USING THE SYSTEM AS A TABLET If you would like to use the system as a tablet, perform the following steps. Rotate the system display only in the direction indicated in the procedure. Turning the display in the incorrect direction could damage the hinge. In the following step, be sure to position the display perpendicular to the keyboard, otherwise the keyboard or display cover could get scratched. 1. Lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. (Figure 2-12). 2. When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it clockwise (when viewed from the top). Be very careful to rotate it in the direction indicated.
(Figure 2-13). Turn the display 180 degrees so that it is facing backwards. (Figure 2-14) 3. Holding the top edge of the display panel, pull it forward until it is lying nearly atop the keyboard. 16 P Series.book Page 17 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C 90o Figure 2-12. Fully open display Figure 2-13. Rotating the display Figure 2-14. Display rotated completely Figure 2-15. System in tablet configuration ADJUSTING DISPLAY PANEL BRIGHTNESS Once you have turned on your notebook, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are three ways to adjust the brightness, keyboard, power management utility, and Fujitsu menu. Using Keyboard to Adjust Brightness Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting (i.e., the settings you make via the func-
tion keys automatically changes the brightness settings in the systems Brightness Control settings).
[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.
[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. Using Power Management to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility, click Start -> Control Panel -> Brightness Control. Set the screen brightness slider for battery and AC power scenarios. Using the Fujitsu Menu to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness using the Fujitsu menu, click on the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray in the lower right corner of the screen. From the menu that appears, select Brightness Control. The Brightness Control window will open. Set the screen brightness slider for battery and AC power scenarios. If using AC power, your brightness setting is set to its highest level by default. If using battery power your brightness settings is set to approximately mid-level by default. The higher the brightness level, the more power the LifeBook P Series notebook will consume and the faster your batteries will discharge. For maximum battery life, make sure that the brightness is set as low as possible. 17 P Series.book Page 18 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Function Keys Back Space Fn Key Start Key Numeric Keypad
(outlined with thick black line) Figure 2-16. Keyboard Application Key Cursor Keys Keyboard USING THE KEYBOARD Your LifeBook P Series notebook has an integral 82-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys. (Figure 2-16) Numeric keypad: Your notebook allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to tog-
gle between the standard character and numerical keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key. Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running. Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system and function the same as the onscreen Start menu button, or the right button on your pointing device. NUMERIC KEYPAD Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] key. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary func-
tions. (Figure 2-16) WINDOWS KEYS Your LifeBook P Series notebook has two Windows keys:
a Start key and an Application key. The Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The Application key func-
tions the same as your right mouse button and displays shortcut menus for the selected item. (Please refer to your Windows documentation for additional informa-
tion regarding the Windows keys.) (Figure 2-16) CURSOR KEYS The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left, and right in applications. In programs such as Windows Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). (Figure 2-16) 18 P Series.book Page 19 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C FUNCTION KEYS Your notebook has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. The functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software docu-
mentation to find out how these keys are used.
(Figure 2-16)
[Fn] Key The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the notebook and is always used in conjunction with another key.
[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.
[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the built-in pointing device on and off. Note that the
[Fn+F4] combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See Entering the BIOS Setup Utility on page 30)
[Fn +F5]: Pressing [F5] while holding [Fn] allows you to toggle between video compensation and no compensation. (Video compensation controls spacing on the display. When it is enabled, displays with less than 1024 x 768 or 800 x 600 pixel resolution will still cover the entire screen.)
[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will lower the brightness of your display. Note that adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting.
[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will increase the brightness of the display.
[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will decrease the volume of your notebook.
[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will increase the volume of your notebook.
[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order, are: built-in display panel only, both built-in display panel, and external monitor or external moni-
tor only. 19 P Series.book Page 20 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o
. A
. B n Application A Application B Button 3 Button 4 Button Button Enter Button Figure 2-17. LifeBook P Series notebook application buttons LifeBook Application Panel A unique feature of your LifeBook P Series notebook is the application panel buttons. These buttons allow you to launch specific applications with the touch of a button. The five application buttons are located on the bottom left-hand side of the display when it is configured to be used as a notebook. (Figure 2-17) All five of the buttons have primary functions. Four of the buttons have secondary functions when used as application buttons. The secondary functions are acti-
vated by pressing the Function (Fn) button while pressing the application button. See Table 2-2 for specific functions. The secondary functions of the Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch any application. See Changing Button Functions on page 21. Button Icon Primary Function Page Down Page Up Secondary Function
(Fn + Button) User-defined Application A
(Default = Calculator User-Defined Application B
(Default = WordPad Screen Rotation VGA-Out Secondary Function Selection Fujitsu Menu Utility Ctl+Alt+Del Button None Table 2-2. Application Button Functions Page Down / Application A Button When you press the Page Down button when the system is running, each press of the button will scroll the screen down one frame. This allows you to navigate quickly through large documents. When you press the Fn button while you press then release the Page Down/Application A button, you will automatically start whichever program is assigned to the button. The default application for this button is Calcu-
lator. See Changing Button Functions on page 21 to select a different application for this button. Page Up / Application B Button When you press the Page Up button when the system is running, each press of the button will scroll the screen up one frame. This allows you to navigate quickly through large documents. When you press the Fn button while you press then release the Page Up/Application A button, you will 20 P Series.book Page 21 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C automatically start whichever program is assigned to the button. The default application for this button is WordPad. See Changing Button Functions on page 21. to select a different application for this button. CHANGING BUTTON FUNCTIONS The Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch a program or perform an action you select. By default, the Application A button launches the Calcu-
lator, and the Application B button launches WordPad. Screen Rotation / VGA-Out Button The screen rotation feature would normally be used only when the system is configured as a tablet. When you would like to use the tablet as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation; when accessing spreadsheets or using the system as a note-
book, you would more typically use landscape orienta-
tion. When the system is changed to tablet configuration, the orientation automatically changes to portrait mode by default. The screen orientation default can be changed by going to the Control Panel and double-clicking on the Fujitsu Display Control icon and selecting the desired defaults from the Display Orientation section. After changing the defaults, click
[OK]. When you press the Screen Rotation / VGA-Out button, the system screen orientation changes from portrait
(vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or from landscape to portrait. Function / Fujitsu Menu Utility Button The Function button works in conjunction with the other application buttons to provide additional func-
tionality for the buttons. Refer to specific details above. Pressing the Fn button twice in succession causes the Fujitsu Menu Utility to appear on your screen, allowing you to modify certain system settings. Ctl+Alt+Del Button Pressing and holding the Ctl-Alt-Del button for up to 750 milliseconds launches the Logon screen or the Windows Task Manager (if the system hasnt yet been configured). To launch different applications or cause the Applica-
tion A or B buttons to perform a specific action:
1. Double-click on the Tablet Button Settings icon in the Control Panel. 2. Select the button you would like to change from the list. 3. Click [Change] and open the drop down list in the Action: field. 4. Select the action you would like the button to perform. If you want to launch a program, click on Launch an Application then browse to the location of the program. 5. Click [OK], then click [OK] again. The buttons will now perform the actions you have assigned to them. 21 P Series.book Page 22 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Left Button Scroll Button Right Button Cursor Control Figure 2-18. Touchpad pointing device Quick Point Pointing Device/Touch Screen The Quick Point is built into your LifeBook notebook. It is used to control the movement of the cursor to select items on your display panel. The Quick Point is composed of a cursor control at the center of the keyboard and three buttons on the palm rest of your notebook. The cursor control works the same way a mouse ball does, and moves the cursor around the display. It only requires light pressure with the tip of your finger, and the more pressure you use, the faster the cursor will move. The left button functions the same as a left mouse button while the right button has the same function as a right mouse button. When used with the cursor control, the middle button allows you to scroll up and down a screen. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. (Figure 2-19) CLICKING Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-
click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the bottom button once, and then imme-
diately release it. (Figure 2-19) DOUBLE-CLICKING Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press and release the left button twice. (Figure 2-20) Figure 2-20 Double-clicking If the interval between clicks is too long, the double-click will not be executed. Parameters for the Quick Point can be adjusted from the Mouse dialog box located in the Windows Control Panel. DRAGGING Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. (Figure 2-21) Figure 2-19 Clicking 22 Figure 2-21 Dragging P Series.book Page 23 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM QUICK POINT CONTROL ADJUSTMENT The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your Quick Point with selections made from within the Mouse Properties dialog box. There are three aspects of Quick Point operation, which you can adjust:
Buttons: This tab lets you set up the buttons for right or left handed operation, in addition to setting up the time interval allowed between clicks in double-click-
ing. Pointers: This tab lets you set up the scheme for the cursor depending on its functionality. Pointer Options: This tab lets you set up a relation between the speed of your finger motion and the speed of the cursor. It also allows you to enable a Pointer Trail for the cursor arrow. TOUCH SCREEN The integrated Touch Screen allows you to use either the included stylus or your fingertip, as a pointing device. Do not use excessive force when tapping or writing on the screen with the stylus or your finger. Use of excessive force could result in damage to the LCD and/or Touch Screen. You can use the stylus to click, double-click, drag items and icons, or to draw like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. See the documentation that came with your application for details. (Figure 2-22) G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C To purchase additional or replacement styluses, visit Fujitsus accessories web site at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Clicking To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately. You also have the option to perform the left-click operation by tapping lightly with your finger on the Touch Screen once. (Figure 2-23) Right-Clicking To right-click, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Touch Panel. From the Right Button Simulation tab you can specify a right button tool by using the selected button prior to the desired right mouse click. Figure 2-23 Clicking the Touch Screen Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immedi-
ately remove the stylus tip. You also have the option to perform the double-click operation by tapping lightly with your finger on the Touch Screen twice.
(Figure 2-24) Figure 2-22 Using the Stylus with the Touch Screen To avoid potential scratching and damage, never use anything but the included stylus or your finger with the Touch Screen. Figure 2-24 Double-clicking the Touch Screen 23 Do not use excessive force when tapping on the screen during calibration. Use of excessive force could result in damage to the LCD and/or touch panel. When using the stylus to calibrate the screen, be sure to avoid touching the screen with your fingers; doing so could result in faulty calibration. 4. Using the stylus, firmly touch the screen directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 5. Repeat step 4 until you have selected a total of nine symbols. This is the minimum number of points necessary to calibrate your touch screen. 6. Once you have selected the nine symbols, press the
[Update] button. 7. Touch the stylus to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate Now] button to begin again. P Series.book Page 24 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Touch Screen with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it. Dragging can also be done using your fingertip. (Figure 2-25) Figure 2-25 Dragging on the Touch Screen Calibrating the Touch Screen In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Touch Screen Calibration Utility before you use the Touch Screen for the first time, or after you change the display resolution and/or orien-
tation. To run the calibration utility:
1. Go to Start -> Control Panel -> Touch Panel and select the Calibration tab. 2. Press the [Calibrate Now] button. 3. Adjust the display of your notebook to a comfortable angle and find the red (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. 24 P Series.book Page 25 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r T a b l e t P C Volume Control Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has multiple volume controls which interact with each other. Any software that contains audio files will also contain a volume control of its own. If you install an external audio device that has an independent volume control, the hardware volume control and the software volume control will interact with each other. It should be noted that if you set your software volume to Off, you will override the external volume control setting. CONTROLLING THE VOLUME The volume can be controlled in several different ways:
Volume can be set from within the Volume Control on the Taskbar. Volume can be controlled with the [F8] and [F9] func-
tions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will decrease the volume of your notebook. Pressing
[F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your notebook. There are twenty-six levels through which the function keys cycle. Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications. Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 25 P Series.book Page 26 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T w o 26 P Series.book Page 27 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 3 Using Your LifeBook 27 P Series.book Page 28 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T h r e e 28 P Series.book Page 29 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM G e t t i n g S t a r t e d DC Power Plug DC Output Cable AC Adapter AC Cable Figure 3-1. Connecting the AC Adapter Power Sources Your LifeBook P Series notebook has three possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. CONNECTING THE POWER ADAPTERS The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your notebook and charging the battery. Connecting the AC Adapter 1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your notebook. 2. Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet.
(Figure 3-1) Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your notebook. 2. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile with the ignition key in the On or Accessories position. OR 3. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1. Be sure that you have a charged battery installed. 2. Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. The Lithium ion battery is not charged upon purchase. Initially, you will need to connect either the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter to use your notebook. 29 P Series.book Page 30 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T h r e e Starting Your LifeBook POWER ON The Suspend/Resume button is used to turn on your LifeBook P Series notebook from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion battery, you can power on your notebook.
(See figure 2-4 on page 9 for location). When you turn on your notebook, be sure you have a power source. This means that a battery is installed and charged, or that a power adapter is connected and has power. Press the Suspend/Resume button to start your system. When you are done working you can either leave your notebook in Standby mode, See Standby Mode on page 32., or you can turn it off. See Power Off on page 34.. When the system display is closed, the Suspend/Resume button is disabled. This feature prevents the system from being accidentally powered up when not in use. When you Power On your notebook, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your notebook will emit an audio warning and/
or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 58. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the Power On Self Test
(POST), your notebook will load your operating system. Never turn off your notebook during the Power On Self Test (POST) or it will cause an error message to be displayed when you turn your notebook on the next time. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 58. BOOT SEQUENCE The procedure for starting-up your notebook is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your notebooks BIOS. When your notebook is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instruc-
tions to start up your notebook. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your notebook, it goes through a boot sequence which 30 displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system is loaded. During booting, your notebook is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test
(POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:
You turn on the power to your notebook. You restart your notebook from the Windows Shut Down dialog box. The software initiates a system restart (e.g., when you install a new application). BIOS SETUP UTILITY The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the operating environment for your notebook. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your notebook. The BIOS Setup Utility configures:
Device control feature parameters, such as changing I/O addresses and boot devices. System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:
1. Turn on or restart your notebook. 2. Press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. 3. Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your notebooks BIOS is available online. Please visit our service and support Web site at http://
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Once there, select LifeBook BIOS Guides from the pull-down menu for your notebook series. If you are unsure of your note-
books BIOS number, refer to your packing slip. If your data security settings require it, you may be asked for a password before the BIOS main menu will appear. P Series.book Page 31 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM BOOTING THE SYSTEM We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your LifeBook notebook for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Registering Windows with Microsoft In order to ensure that you receive the most benefits from the Windows operating system, it should be registered the first time you use it. After you receive the Windows Welcome screen, you will be prompted to enter registration information in the following order. First of all, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs). After accepting the EULAs, you will be asked if you want to enable the Auto-
matic Updates feature. Acceptance of this feature is recommended because it allows your system to be updated automatically whenever an important change becomes available for your notebook. If you reject the terms of the license agreement you will be asked to review the license agreement for information on returning Windows or to shut down your LifeBook notebook. You cannot use your LifeBook notebook until you have accepted the License Agreement. If you stop the process your notebook will return to the beginning of the Windows Welcome Process, even if you shut your notebook down and start it up again. Several additional windows will appear, prompting you to enter a name and description for your computer, an Administrator password, and a domain name. Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in the infor-
mation as directed. You will then be automatically connected to the Internet, if you have an appropriate connection avail-
able. If an automatic connection is not possible, you will be asked about how you dial out from where you will be using your LifeBook notebook. If you are not connected to a phone line and plan to register at a later time, you may click the Skip button. Once you are connected to the Internet, you will be asked if you wish to continue with the registration. If you select Yes you will then enter your name and address, and email address if desired. Click Next to complete registration. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d REGISTERING YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK How do I register my LifeBook notebook?
You can register your LifeBook by going to our Web site:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. ClickMe!
INSTALLING CLICK ME!
The first time you boot up your system, you will see an icon called Click Me! in the Start menu. When you click the Click Me! icon, your system will automatically build the icon tray in the bottom right of the screen. These icons provide links to utilities that you will frequently access. 31 P Series.book Page 32 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T h r e e Power Management Your LifeBook P Series notebook has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention, such as those for the internal modem. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your oper-
ating conditions, such as those for the display bright-
ness. Internal power management for your notebook may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your notebook battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your notebook into Standby mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power Mode Fully On Mode Standby Mode
(Suspend-to-RAM) Hibernation Mode
(Suspend-to-Disk) Power Off System Activity Events causing system to enter mode state System is running. CPU, system bus, and all other interfaces operate at full speed. Resume system logic remains powered and RAM remains powered to maintain active data. All other devices are turned off. From Standby mode: System operation resumed
(Suspend/Resume button pressed, resume on modem ring, resume on time). From Hibernation mode: Suspend/Resume button pressed. From Off mode: Suspend/Resume button pressed. Standby timeout occurs. Suspend request issued by software or by pressing the Suspend/Resume button. Low battery. Windows saves desktop state (including open files and documents) to hard disk. CPU stops. All other devices are turned off. Suspend timeout occurs. Clicking Start -> Shut Down -> Hibernate
(It may be necessary to Enable Hibernate Support from Windows Power Options.) System is fully powered off except for logic components required for Suspend/
Resume button and real-time clock operation. Low battery condition System shutdown. Low battery condition Table 3-1. System Power States SUSPEND/RESUME BUTTON When your notebook is active, the Suspend/Resume button can be used to manually put your notebook into Standby mode. Push the Suspend/Resume button when your notebook is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. You will hear two short beeps and your system will enter Standby mode. (See figure 2-6 on page 11 for location). If your notebook is suspended, pushing the Suspend/
Resume button will return your notebook to active oper-
ation. You can tell whether or not your system is in Standby mode by looking at the Power indicator. See on page 14. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your notebook is fully operational. If the indicator is both visible and flashing, your notebook is in Standby mode. If the indicator is not visible at all, the power is off or your notebook is in Hibernate mode (See Hibernate Mode) 32 STANDBY MODE Standby mode in Windows saves the contents of your notebooks system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode will turn off the CPU, the display, the hard drive, and all of the other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and allow for restarting. Your notebook can be put in Standby mode by:
Pressing the Suspend/Resume button when your system is turned on. Selecting Standby from the Windows Shut Down menu. Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. Closing the system cover. Your notebooks system memory typically stores the file(s) on which you are working, open application(s) information, and any other data required to support the operation(s) in progress. When you resume operation P Series.book Page 33 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM from Standby mode, your notebook will return to the point where it left off. To resume operation, you must use the Suspend/Resume button to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your notebook will not resume. If you are running your notebook on battery power, be aware that the battery continues to discharge while your notebook is in Standby mode, though not as fast as when fully operational. HIBERNATE MODE The Hibernate mode saves the contents of your notebooks system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. Your notebook is pre-
configured to perform this function. The Hibernate mode can also be configured through the system BIOS to run in other ways depending on what you need to accomplish. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. Standby or Hibernate modes should not be used with certain PC Cards. Check your PC Card documentation for more information. Disabling the Suspend/Resume button prevents it from being used to put your notebook in Standby or Hibernate mode. The resume function of the button cannot be disabled. If your notebook is actively accessing information when you enter Standby or Hibernate mode, changes to open files are not lost. The files are left open and memory is kept active during Standby mode or the memory is transferred to the hard drive during Hibernate mode. When PC Cards or external devices are in use, Save-to-Disk mode cannot return to the exact state prior to suspension, because all peripheral devices will be re-
initialized when the system restarts. The main advantage of using Hibernate mode is that power is not required to maintain your data. This is very impor-
tant if you will be leaving your notebook in a suspended state for a prolonged period of time. The drawback of using Hibernate mode is that it lengthens the power down and power up sequences and resets peripheral devices. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate default setting is enabled for Windows XP. To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these easy steps:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel -> Power Options. 2. Select the Hibernate tab and then select the box to enable or disable this feature. To use Hibernate mode with your system:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel -> Power Options. 2. Select the Power Schemes tab and in the System hibernates boxes, select the amount of time you want to elapse until the system goes into hibernation
(when plugged in and when running on battery power). DISPLAY TIMEOUT The Video Timeout is one of the power management parameters. This feature saves power by turning off the display if there is no keyboard or pointer activity for the user selected timeout period. Any keyboard or pointer activity will cause the display to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button and can be enabled and disabled in Windows Power Management. HARD DISK TIMEOUT The Hard Disk Timeout is another one of the power management parameters. This feature saves power by turning off the hard drive if there is no hard drive activity for the user selected timeout period. Any attempt to access the hard drive will cause it to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button and can be enabled and disabled in Windows. WINDOWS POWER MANAGEMENT The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the notebook on battery power or one of the adapters. RESTARTING THE SYSTEM If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1. Click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. 2. Select the Restart button from within the Turn Off Computer window. 33 P Series.book Page 34 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n T h r e e Turning off your notebook without exiting Windows or turning on your notebook within 10 seconds of the notebook being shut off may cause an error when you start the next time. POWER OFF Before turning off the power by choosing Turn Off Computer from the Windows Start menu, check that the Hard Drive access indicator is off. (See Figure 2-9 on page 14) If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your notebook shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down proce-
dure. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your notebook to complete its opera-
tions and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:
1. Click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. 2. Select the Turn Off option from within the window. If you are going to store your notebook for a month or more, see the Care and Maintenance section. 34 P Series.book Page 35 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 4 User-Installable Features 35 P Series.book Page 36 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r 36 P Series.book Page 37 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Lithium ion Battery Your LifeBook P Series notebook has a Lithium ion battery that provides power for operating your note-
book when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemi-
cals or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:
When used at temperatures lower than 41 F (5 C) or higher than 95 F (35 C). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range. See on page 14. When using a high current device such as a modem, CD-ROM drive, or hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. Do not leave a faulty battery in your notebook. It may damage your AC adapter, optional Auto/Airline adapter, or your notebook itself. It may also pre-
vent operation of your notebook by draining all available current into the bad battery. Under federal, state, or local law it may be illegal to dispose of batteries by putting them in the trash. Please take care of our environment and dispose of batteries properly. Check with your local government authority for details regarding recycling or disposing of old batteries. If you cannot find this infor-
mation elsewhere, contact your support representative at 1-800-8Fujitsu. Actual battery life will vary based on screen brightness, applications, features, power management settings, battery condition and other customer preferences. CD-ROM drive or hard drive usage may also have a significant impact on battery life. The battery charging capacity is reduced as the battery ages. If your battery is running low quickly, you should replace it with a new one. RECHARGING THE BATTERY If you want to know the condition of the Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. U s e r - I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your notebook and connect the AC or Auto/
Airline adapter. Make sure that the Battery Charging indicator and the Battery Level indicator icon on the Status Indicator Panel light. There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery, therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be longer if your notebook is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your notebook into Standby mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. See Power Management on page 32. Using heavy current devices such as a modem or frequent CD-ROM and PCMCIA powered external device accesses may prevent charging completely. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, the Battery Level indi-
cator will glow red. If you do not respond to the low battery alarm, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. Your notebook will then go into Standby mode to try and protect your data for as long as possible. There is no guarantee that your data will not be lost once the notebook reaches this point. Once the low battery indicator appears you must save all your data and put your notebook into Standby mode until you can provide a new power source. You should provide a charged battery or AC or Auto/Airline Adapter as soon as possible. When you are in Standby mode there must always be at least one power source active. If you remove all power sources while your notebook is in Standby mode, any data that has not been saved to the hard drive will be lost. 37 P Series.book Page 38 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r Once your notebook goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Suspend/Resume button to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your notebook while an adapter is charging the battery. REPLACING THE BATTERY Your LifeBook P Series notebook comes with one battery pack; you might want to consider purchasing a spare. By keeping a spare battery fully charged, you can immedi-
ately swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries: cold-swapping and hot-swapping. Cold-swapping means swapping batteries when the system has been powered down; hot-swapping is performed when the system is powered by AC power. Cold-swapping batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery compartment, follow these easy steps: (Figure 4-1) 1. Have a charged battery ready to install. 2. Shut down your notebook and disconnect the AC adapter. 3. Lift the display enough to pull the display latch from the slot. 4. Press the battery release latches to open the compartment. 5. Remove the battery from the compartment. 6. Slide the new battery into the compartment. 7. Close the compartment and the battery release latches will click into place. 8. Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. 38 Figure 4-1. Removing the Battery Hot-swapping Batteries To hot-swap batteries in your battery compartment follow these easy steps: (Figure 4-1) 1. Close any open files and put your notebook into Standby mode. 2. Connect an AC adapter or Auto/Airline power adapter to provide power to the system. 3. Lift the display enough to pull the display latch from the slot. 4. Press the battery release latches inward to open the compartment. 5. Remove the battery from the compartment. 6. Slide the new battery into the compartment. 7. Close the compartment and the battery release latches will click into place. 8. Press the Suspend/Resume button to return your notebook to normal operation. If the Lithium ion battery connector is not fully seated, you may not be able to use your notebook or charge your battery. P Series.book Page 39 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Memory Upgrade Module Your Fujitsu LifeBook P Series notebook comes with a minimum of 256 MB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic RAM 2 (DDR2 SDRAM), 400 MHz factory installed. To increase your systems memory capacity, you may install a memory upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100% compatibility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com. Do not remove any screws from the memory upgrade module compartment except those specifically shown in the directions for installing and removing the module. INSTALLING MEMORY UPGRADE MODULES 1. Turn off power to your LifeBook notebook and remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline). 2. Make sure that all the connector covers are closed. 3. Turn the notebook bottom side up, and remove the screws of the memory upgrade module compart-
ment. (Figure 4-2) 4. Remove the cover. Figure 4-2. Opening the Memory Upgrade Compartment 5. Remove the memory upgrade module from the static guarded sleeve. 6. Align the memory upgrade module with the component side up. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module with the connector slot in the compartment. (Figure 4-3) U s e r - I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s 7. Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45 angle. Press the connector edge of the module firmly down and into the connector until it lodges under the retaining clip. You will hear a click when it is prop-
erly in place. Figure 4-3. Installing a Memory Module 8. Replace the cover. (Figure 4-4) 9. Replace the screws. Figure 4-4. Replacing the Memory Compartment Cover The memory upgrade module is not something you routinely remove from your notebook. Once it is installed, you should leave it in place unless you want to change system memory capacity. TO REMOVE A MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE 1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory Upgrade Module. 2. Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the memory upgrade module at the same time. 3. While holding the clips out, remove the module from the slot by lifting it up and pulling towards the rear of your notebook. 4. Store the memory upgrade module in a static guarded sleeve. 5. Replace the cover. (Figure 4-4) 6. Replace the screws. 39 P Series.book Page 40 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r CHECKING THE MEMORY CAPACITY Once you have changed the system memory capacity by either adding or removing a memory upgrade module, be sure to check that your notebook has recognized the change. Your notebook uses Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT), which allows the video driver to dynamically determine the amount of memory that is used. Your notebook can use a maximum of 128 MB of system memory for video functions. You can check the memory capacity by clicking [Start]
-> Control Panel, then double-clicking the System icon. Select the General tab and check the amount of memory under Computer. The amount of memory displayed should be approxi-
mately the total of all memory modules installed. There may be a discrepancy of several megabytes which are allocated for fixed video memory. If the total memory displayed is incorrect, check that your memory upgrade module is properly installed. (If the module is properly installed and the capacity is still not correctly recognized, see Troubleshooting on page 52. 40 P Series.book Page 41 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM U s e r - I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s SD Card Slot SD Card Figure 4-5. Inserting an SD Card REMOVING AN SD CARD To remove an SD Card, first see your SD Card manual for instructions. Some cards may require your LifeBook notebook to be in Suspend Mode or Off while removing them. To remove the card from the slot, simply pull it out. Secure Digital Media Your LifeBook notebook supports Secure Digital (SD) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Secure Digital (SD) Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. It uses flash memory architecture. INSERTING SD CARDS SD Cards are inserted in the SD Card slot (Figure 4-9). To insert an SD Card, follow these steps:
inserting or removing an SD Card during your LifeBook notebooks shutdown or bootup process may damage the card and/or your LifeBook notebook. Do not insert a card into a slot if there is water or any other substance on the card as you may permanently damage the card, your LifeBook notebook, or both. 1. See your SD Card manual for instructions on the insertion of your card. Some cards may require that your notebook is off while inserting them. 2. Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card. 3. Insert your card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4. Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. 41 P Series.book Page 42 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Compact Flash Card Slot Compact Flash Card Compact Flash Card Eject Button Figure 4-6. Compact Flash Card Slot Compact Flash Card Eject Button Compact Flash Slot Plug Figure 4-7. Removing Compact Flash Slot plug 3. When the Compact Flash Slot plug is ejected, remove it from the slot. 4. Insert your Compact Flash Card into the slot, with the product label facing up. 5. Push the card into the slot firmly until it is seated in the opening. You will hear a click and the Eject button will pop away from your notebook. Compact Flash Cards Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook supports Compact Flash (CF) cards, which can perform a variety of func-
tions. Some available Compact Flash Cards:
Memory cards Fax/data modem cards Local area network (LAN) cards For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with your CF Card. INSERTING COMPACT FLASH CARDS Compact Flash Cards are inserted in the Compact Flash Card slot. To insert a Compact Flash Card, follow these steps: (Figure 4-2) Inserting or removing a Compact Flash Card during your LifeBook notebooks shutdown or bootup process may dam-
age the card and/or your notebook. Do not insert a Compact Flash Card into a slot if there is water or any other sub-
stance on the card as you may perma-
nently damage the card, your LifeBook notebook, or both. 1. See your Compact Flash Card manual for specific instructions on the insertion of your card. Some Compact Flash Cards may require your notebook to be Off while inserting them. 2. When you receive your LifeBook, there will be a protective plug inserted in the slot. Whenever you dont have a Compact Flash Card inserted, be sure to replace the plug to prevent system contamination. To remove the plug, press the Compact Flash Card eject button. (Figure 4-3) 42 P Series.book Page 43 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s REMOVING COMPACT FLASH CARDS To remove a Compact Flash Card, follow these easy steps:
Windows has a shutdown procedure for Compact Flash Cards that must be fol-
lowed before removing a card. (Please review your operating system manual for the correct procedure). 1. See your Compact Flash Card manual for specific instructions on removing your card. Some Compact Flash Cards may require your notebook to be in Suspend Mode or Off while removing them. If the dialog box states that the device cannot be removed, you must save all of your open files, close any open applica-
tions and shut down your notebook. 2. Push the eject button in until it is flush with the notebook. This will push the Compact Flash Card slightly out of the slot allowing you to remove the card. 43 P Series.book Page 44 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r Docking Port DC Power Jack LAN (RJ-45) Jack External Monitor Port Port Replicator Release Latch USB Ports Figure 4-8. Port Replicator rear panel Port Replicator An optional Port Replicator is available from Fujitsu to support your LifeBook P Series notebook. The Port Replicator extends the functionality of your notebook by providing ports to connect USB devices, an external monitor, external speaker, or a LAN device. The Port Replicator connects to the bottom of your notebook. See Device Ports on page 46. PORT REPLICATOR COMPONENTS Following is a description of the Port Replicator components.
(Figure 4-11) DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your notebook and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. USB 2.0 Ports (Qty. 2) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices. USB 2.0 ports are backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices. External Monitor Port The external monitor port allows you to connect an external VGA or SVGA monitor. Note that if a Port Replicator is attached, you must use the external monitor port on the Port Replicator, not the one on your system. LAN (RJ-45) Jack The LAN jack allows you to connect a LAN to the Port Repli-
cator. Note that when the system is attached to the Port Repli-
cator, the LAN Jack on the Port Replicator should be used, not the one on the system. 44 Docking Port The docking port connects the Port Replicator to your LifeBook notebook. Port Replicator Release Latch Pull the Port Replicator Release latch away from the Port Repli-
cator to remove the Port Replicator from your notebook. ATTACHING PORT REPLICATOR To attach the Port Replicator, align the Port Replicator connector on the bottom of your notebook with the connector on the Port Replicator and push the corners down simulta-
neously. (Figure 4-12) Figure 4-9. Attaching the Port Replicator DETACHING PORT REPLICATOR To detach the Port Replicator:
1. Pull the Port Replicators release latch away from the Port Replicator to release it from your notebook. (Figure 4-13) P Series.book Page 45 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM U s e r - I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s Figure 4-10. Unlatching the Port Replicator 2. Pull the notebook away from the Port Replicator to detach it from your notebook. (Figure 4-14) Figure 4-11. Removing the Port Replicator 45 P Series.book Page 46 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r Device Ports Your LifeBook P Series notebook and the optional Port Replicator come equipped with multiple Device Ports to which you can connect an external device including: disk drives, keyboards, modems, printers, etc. MODEM (RJ-11) JACK The modem (RJ-11) jack is used for an internal modem. To connect the telephone cable follow these easy steps:
(See figure 2-7 on page 12 for location) 1. Align the connector with the jack opening. 2. Push the connector into the jack until it is seated. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cable into a telephone outlet. The internal modem is not intended for use with Digital PBX systems. Do not connect the internal modem to a Digital PBX as it may cause serious damage to the internal modem or your entire LifeBook P Series notebook. Consult your PBX manufacturers documentation for details. Some hotels have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find out BEFORE you connect your modem. The internal modem is designed to the ITU V.90 standard. Its maximum speed of 53000 bps is the highest allowed by FCC, and its actual connection rate depends on the line conditions. The maximum speed is 33600 bps at upload. The internal modem on all LifeBook P Series notebooks from Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation are certified for use in the United States and Canada. Depending upon the configuration of your system, your LifeBook notebook may have either a LAN jack or an IEEE 1394 jack. INTERNAL LAN (RJ-45) JACK The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal 10/
100 BaseTx Ethernet connection. You will need to configure your notebook to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps: (See figure 2-7 on page 12 for location) 46 Note that the optional Port Replicator is designed to cover the LAN jack located on the system. This design ensures that the LAN jack on the Port Replicator is the only one used when the Port Replicator is installed. 1. Align the connector with the jack opening. 2. Push the connector into the jack until it is seated. 3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. DOCKING PORT The docking port is used for the connection of your notebook to an optional port replicator. In order to connect your notebook to one of these devices follow the instructions that came with your port replicator. (See figure 2-8 on page 13 for location) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS PORTS The two Universal Serial Bus 2.0 ports (USB) allow you to connect USB devices such as external floppy disk drives, external DVD drives, game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. USB 2.0 is down-
ward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, so older USB devices will work with these ports. USB 2.0 is a much faster design, running forty times faster than USB 1.1. In order to connect a USB device, follow these easy steps:
(See figure 2-7 on page 12 for location) 1. Align the connector with the port opening. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. MICROPHONE JACK The microphone jack allows you to connect an external mono microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mono mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your notebook. In order to connect a microphone follow these easy steps: (See figure 2-4 on page 9 for location) 1. Align the connector with the port opening. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. HEADPHONE JACK The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your notebook. Your headphones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8
(3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect head-
phones or speakers follow these easy steps: (See figure 2-4 on page 9 for location) 1. Align the connector with the port opening. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. P Series.book Page 47 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM U s e r - I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s If you plug headphones into the headphone jack, the built-in stereo speakers will be disabled. EXTERNAL VIDEO PORT The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an external device follow these easy steps: (See figure 2-7 on page 12 for location). There is also an external VGA monitor on the port replicator (See figure 4-11 on page 44 for location). 1. Remove the cover from the port opening, if present. 2. Align the connector with the port opening. 3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 4. Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each side of the connector. When an external monitor is plugged in, pressing the [Fn] + [F10] keys allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the key combination, you will step to the next choice, starting with the built-in display panel only, moving to the external monitor only, finally moving to both the built-in display panel and an external monitor. When an external monitor is plugged in, pressing the LifeBook Application Panel Secondary Function buttons (Fn + Screen Rotation Button) also allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. 47 P Series.book Page 48 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F o u r 48 P Series.book Page 49 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 5 Troubleshooting 49 P Series.book Page 50 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e 50 P Series.book Page 51 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Troubleshooting Your LifeBook P Series notebook is sturdy and subject to few problems in the field. However, you may encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices, that you can solve by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward problems and identify failures that require service. IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEM If you encounter a problem that you are having diffi-
culty in solving, go through the following procedure before pursuing further troubleshooting:
1. Turn off your notebook. 2. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your note-
book and to an active AC power source. 3. Make sure that any card inserted in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4. Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5. Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it on. 6. Go through the boot sequence. 7. If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. 8. If you still have the problem after taking all of the above approaches, please check our support web site at http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support for possible known support issues. If you keep notes about what you have tried, your support representative may be able to help you more quickly by giv-
ing additional suggestions over the phone. Do not return a failed notebook to your supplier until you have talked to a sup-
port representative. 9. If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table and checked our Web site for possible solutions without success, contact your support representative:
Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com Web site:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support repre-
sentative can provide you with the fastest possible solu-
tion:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your notebook for configuration and serial numbers. (See figure 2-8 on page 13 for location) SPECIFIC PROBLEMS Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your notebook, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you diffi-
culty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your notebook. 51 P Series.book Page 52 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE Problem Page Audio Problems . page 52 Docking Problems . page 52 Hard Drive Problems . page 52 Keyboard or Mouse Problems. page 52 Pen Input Problems . page 53 Memory Problems . page 53 Problem Page Modem Problems. page 53 USB Device Problems . page 53 Power Failures . page 54 Shutdown and Startup Problems . page 55 Video Problems . page 56 Miscellaneous Problems . page 57 Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Audio Problems There is no sound coming from the built-in speakers. The software volume control is set too low. Adjust the sound volume control settings in your software, operating system and applications. Port Replicator Problems notebook does not turn on when installed in optional Port Replicator Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. Headphones are plugged into your notebook. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers, remove the headphones. Software driver is not config-
ured correctly. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. Sound could have been muted with function keys. Press [F3] while holding the [Fn] key to toggle the sound on and off. Port Replicator AC adapter is not plugged in. Notebook is not properly seated in the Port Replicator. Provide power to the Port Replicator. Remove and re-dock your notebook. The setup utility is incorrectly set for your internal (Primary Master) hard drive. Revise BIOS settings to set the Primary Master correctly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable CD-ROM was used to start the notebook. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Security is set so your oper-
ating system cannot be started without a password. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The notebook has gone into Standby mode. Push the Suspend/Resume button. Your application has locked out your keyboard. The NumLock key has been toggled on. Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your system. If this fails, turn your notebook off by pressing the suspend/resume button for 10 seconds or more, and then turn it back on. Press the NumLock key to toggle it off. 52 P Series.book Page 53 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system soft-
ware is not set up with the correct driver for that device. Your operating system soft-
ware is not set up with the correct driver for that device. Your system has crashed. Pen Input Problems Cursor is not tracking the pen The system may be uncalibrated Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 46. Check your device and operating system docu-
mentation and activate the proper driver. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Try to restart your notebook. If that fails, turn off the power by pressing the suspend/resume button for at least 10 seconds, and then power back on. If the cursor on the screen appears to be misaligned with the pen or is not accurately tracking the pen, calibrate the pen. See Calibrating the Touch Screen on page 24. Memory Problems Power On screen or Info menu of BIOS setup utility information, does not show the correct amount of installed memory. Modem Problems Messages about modem operation. Your memory upgrade module is not properly installed. Turn off your notebook. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 39. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 58. Messages about modem operation are generated by whichever modem application is in use. See your application software documentation for additional information. Modem does not appear to work. Modem may not have been initialized. Verify that the modem has been initialized by the operating system. TO do so, right-click on My Computer and select the Hardware tab. Click
[Device Manager] and click on the + symbol that appears next to Modems. Verify that your device is listed as installed. USB Device Problems You have installed a USB device, but your notebook does not recognize the device, or the device does not seem to work properly. The device is not properly installed. Remove and re-install the device. See Device Ports on page 46. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your notebook is not aware of its installation. Close the application and restart your notebook. Your software may not have the correct driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. Your device and another device are assigned the same I/O address. Check all I/O addresses located within the BIOS setup utility and any other installed hardware or software to make sure there are no duplications. 53 P Series.book Page 54 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Power Failures You turn on your notebook and nothing seems to happen. The installed battery is completely discharged or there is no power adapter (AC or Auto/Airline) installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicators on page 14. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty. The battery is low. Use the Status Indicator Panel to verify the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicators on page 14. If a battery is indicating a short, remove that battery and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicators on page 14. Use a Power adapter until the battery is charged. The AC or auto/airline adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 29. The Power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. Try a different Power adapter or install a charged optional second battery. The Power adapter (AC or auto/airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane seat jack, or the cars cigarette lighter. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. Your notebook turns off all by itself. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. You are operating on battery power only and have ignored a low battery alarm until the battery is at the dead battery state and your machine has gone into Dead Battery Suspend mode. You have a battery failure. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/Resume button. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. Install a power adapter and then push the Suspend/
Resume button. See Power Sources on page 29. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel, and replace or remove any battery that is shorted. See Status Indicators on page 14. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. Your notebook will not work on battery alone. The battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a Power adapter. No battery is installed. Install a charged battery. 54 P Series.book Page 55 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your notebook will not work on battery alone. The battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing them.
(continued) Your battery is faulty. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. You are running an application that uses a great deal of power due to frequent hard drive or CD-ROM access, or use of a modem or LAN PC card. The power savings features may be disabled. Verify the battery condition using the Status Indi-
cator panel and replace or remove any battery that is shorted. See Status Indicators on page 14. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Check the power management and/or setup utility settings in the Power Savings menu and adjust according to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. The battery has been exposed to high temperatures. The battery is too hot or too cold. The AC Adapter is defective. Replace the battery. Restore the notebook to normal operating tempera-
ture. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when the battery is outside its operating range. Replace with another AC Adapter to see if the problem persists. Replace any defective AC Adapters. Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume button does not work. The Suspend/Resume button is disabled from the Advanced submenu of the Power menu of the setup utility. You did not hold the button in long enough. There may be a conflict with the application software. Enable the button from the setup utility. Hold the button longer. This may need to be a few seconds if your application is preventing the CPU from checking for button pushes. Close all applications and try the button again. The system powers up, and displays power-on information, but fails to load the operating system. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configuration. Set the operating source by pressing the [F2] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen, entering the setup utility and adjusting the source settings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup utility and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. 55 P Series.book Page 56 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions An error message is displayed on the screen during the notebook boot sequence. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when the system has resumed. Your notebook appears to change setup parameters when you start it. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. The system may be password-
protected. BIOS setup changes were not saved when you made them and exited the BIOS setup utility returning it to previous settings. See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to determine the meaning and severity of the problem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 58. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. The BIOS CMOS back-up battery has failed. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user-serviceable part. Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your notebook. The angle of the display and the brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. The optional Port Replicator is attached, an external monitor is plugged in, and the note-
book is set for an external monitor only. The power management timeouts may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. The notebook turned on with a series of beeps and your built-in display is blank. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a failure which does not allow the display to operate. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external monitor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Press any button the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. (The display may be shut off by Standby mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) Contact your support representative. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when the system has resumed. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. The system may be password-
protected. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. The notebook has gone into Video Timeout, Standby Mode, or Hibernate Mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Press a button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. 56 P Series.book Page 57 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it.
(continued) The display does not close. The display has bright or dark spots. The application display uses only a portion of your screen and is surrounded by a dark frame. The power management time-
outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and the keyboard. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. You are running an application that does not support 800 x 600/1024 x 768 pixel resolution display and display compres-
sion is enabled. You have connected an external monitor and it does not display any information. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. (The display may be shut off by Standby Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. This is normal; do nothing. The display needs technical diagnosis; contact your support representative. When compensation is disabled, a clearer but smaller display for applications that do not support 800 x 600/1024 x 768 pixel resolution will result. You can fill the screen but have less resolution by changing your compensation setting. (See the Video Features submenu, located within the Advanced menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. Try toggling the video destination by pressing [Fn]
and [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features submenu, located within the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 30. Your external monitor is not properly installed. Reinstall your device. See External Video Port on page 47. Your operating system soft-
ware is not set up with the correct software driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Your external monitor may not be compatible with your note-
book. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. See Specifications on page 71. Miscellaneous Problems An error message is displayed on the screen during the operation of an application. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 57 P Series.book Page 58 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGES The following is an alphabetic list of error-and-status messages that Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check your operating system documentation both on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message and its meaning is not clear, contact your support representative for assistance. nnnn Cache SRAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of system cache in kilobytes successfully tested by the Power On Self Test. (This can only appear if you have an SRAM PC Card installed.)
*Extended RAM Failed at offset: nnnn Extended memory not working or not configured prop-
erly. If you have an installed memory upgrade module, verify that the module is properly installed. If it is prop-
erly installed, you may want to check your Windows Setup to be sure it is not using unavailable memory until you can contact your support representative. nnnn Extended RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of memory in kilobytes successfully tested.
*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard error Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard error nn BIOS discovered a stuck key and displays the scan code for the stuck key. You may have to replace your keyboard but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted and your system may have to be re-installed from your back up media.
*Failing Bits: nnnn The hex number nnnn This is a map of the bits at the memory address (in System, Extended, or Shadow memory) which failed the memory test. Each 1 (one) in the map indicates a failed bit. This is a serious fault that may cause you to lose data if you continue. Contact your support representative.
*Parity Check 1 nnnn Parity error found in the system bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially data destroying failure. Contact your support representative.
*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk Controller Failure (where x = 1-4) The fixed disk is not working or not configured properly. This may mean that the hard drive type identified in your setup utility does not agree with the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to check for the hard drive type settings and correct them if necessary. If the settings are OK and the message appears when you restart the system, there may be a serious fault which might cause you to lose data if you continue. Contact your support representative.
*Invalid NVRAM media type Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have some display prob-
lems. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.
*Parity Check 2 nnnn Parity error found in the I/O bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially data destroying failure. Contact your support representative.
*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press the [F1] key to continue the boot process or the [F2]
key to enter Setup and change any settings.
*Previous boot incomplete Default configuration used Previous Power On Self Test did not complete success-
fully. The Power On Self Test will load default values and offer to run Setup. If the previous failure was caused by incorrect values and they are not corrected, the next boot will likely fail also. If using the default settings does not allow you to complete a successful boot sequence, you should turn off the power and contact your support representative. 58 P Series.book Page 59 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM
*Real time clock error Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.
*Shadow RAM Failed at offset: nnnn Shadow RAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block at which the error was detected. You are risking data corruption if you continue. Contact your support repre-
sentative. nnnn Shadow RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of shadow RAM in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System battery is dead Replace and run SETUP The BIOS CMOS RAM memory hold up battery is dead. This is part of your BIOS and is a board mounted battery which requires a support representative to change. You can continue operating but you will have to use setup utility default values or reconfigure your setup utility every time you turn off your notebook. System BIOS shadowed System BIOS copied to shadow RAM.
*System CMOS checksum bad run SETUP BIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted or modified incorrectly, perhaps by an application program that changes data stored in BIOS memory. Run Setup and reconfigure the system.
*System RAM Failed at offset: nnnn System memory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64k block at which the error was detected. This means that there is a fault in your built-in memory. If you continue to operate, you risk corrupting your data. Contact your support representative for repairs. nnnn System RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of system memory in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System timer error The timer test failed. The main clock that operates the computer is faulty. Requires repair of system board. Contact your support representative for repairs. UMB upper limit segment address: nnnn Displays the address of the upper limit of Upper Memory Blocks, indicating released segments of the BIOS memory which may be reclaimed by a virtual memory manager. Video BIOS shadowed Video BIOS successfully copied to shadow RAM. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g MODEM RESULT CODES The operating system and application software that is factory installed detects the modem characteristics and provides the necessary command strings to operate the modem. The internal modem operation is controlled by generic AT commands from the operating system and application software. The standard long form result codes may, in some cases, be displayed on your screen to keep you informed of the actions of your modem. The operating system and application software may suppress display of the result codes. Examples of result codes are:
OK NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE CONNECT 53000 (Connection complete at 53,000 bps.) ERROR FAX RING (This means an incoming call.) BUSY NO ANSWER When using the internal modem with applications that are not factory installed refer to the application documentation. 59 P Series.book Page 60 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Restoring Your Pre-installed Software The Drivers and Applications Restore (DAR) CD contains sets of device drivers and Fujitsu utilities (in specific directories) that are unique to your notebook configuration for use as documented below. If you have access to the internet, visit the Fujitsu Support web site at http://
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support to check for the most current information, drivers and hints on how to perform recovery and system updates. See Automatically Downloading Driver Updates on page 61. Re-Installing Individual Drivers and Applications The Drivers and Applications CD can be used to selec-
tively re-install drivers and/or applications that may have been un-installed or corrupted. There may be certain free third-party applications pre-installed on your system that are not on the DAR CD. The latest versions of the applications can be downloaded from the third-partys website. To re-install drivers and/or applications:
1. Boot up the system and insert the DAR CD after Windows has started. A Fujitsu Installer screen is displayed after the CD is inserted. 2. After reading the License Agreement, click [I agree]. 3. A window will appear containing a list of applica-
tions, drivers, and utilities that you can install from the Drivers and Applications CD. The components listed are color-coded in terms of their install status. Blue indicates that the component can be installed. Green indicates that the component needs to be installed separately. Grey indicates a component that is already installed; grey items can be reinstalled, but prior to installation you will receive a reminder that the component is already installed. 4. In the list, check off all the components you want to install. If you want to install all components, click
[Select All]. Clicking [Select All] will select all of the blue-coded components; you must select grey and green components separately. 60 5. Once you have selected the components you wish to install, click [Install Selected Subsystems]; the components will be installed. 6. After the components are installed, click [OK], then click [Yes] when asked if you want to reboot the system. RESTORING THE FACTORY IMAGE The Restore Disc that came with your system contains two utilities:
The Recovery utility allows you to restore the original contents of the C: drive. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility on this disc is used to delete all data on your hard disk and prevent it from being reused. Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions.
The use of this disc requires that you have a device capable of reading CDs attached to your system. If you do not have a built-in CD player, you will need to attach an external player. For more information on available external devices, visit our Web site at:
www.shopfujitsu.com.
This disc can only be used with the system with which it was purchased. BOOT Priority Change Before restoring an image, you must first verify that your system is set up to boot from the CD drive. To verify/
change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:
1. Start your system and press the [F2] key when the Fujitsu logo appears. You will enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. Using the arrow keys, go to the Boot menu. 3. Arrow down to the Boot Device Priority submenu. Press [Enter]. If Optical Media Drive or CD-ROM Drive is not at the top of the list, arrow down to the drive in the list, and press the space bar (or the + key) to move it to the top of the list. (The system attempts to boot from the devices in the order in which they are listed.). Note that the BIOS for some systems will indicate CD-ROM Drive, even when a DVD drive is connected. If you have an external drive connected, proceed to step 6; otherwise, proceed to step 7. If you have an external drive connected:
4. 5. 6. P Series.book Page 61 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM
Select the Advanced menu in the BIOS window.
Scroll down to the USB Features submenu and press the Enter key to open it.
If Legacy USB Support is disabled, press the space bar to enable it.
Scroll down to SCSI SubClass Support and press the space bar to enable it. 7. Press [F10], then click on [Yes] to exit the BIOS Setup Utility and return to the boot process. After you have changed the boot priority, you can restore a backup image when you are booting up. Procedure 1. 2. Turn on the power to your system. Ensure that you have a device that can read CDs either installed in your system or attached exter-
nally to it. Insert the Restore Disc into the drive tray. Reboot your system. 3. 4. 5. After the system reboots, follow the instructions that appear to either restore your system image or erase all data from your hard disk. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g AUTOMATICALLY DOWNLOADING DRIVER UPDATES Your system has a convenient tool called the Fujitsu Driver Update (FDU) utility. With FDU, you can choose to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to check for new updates for your system. The FDU icon should appear in the system tray at the bottom right of your screen (roll the cursor over the icons to find the correct one). If the FDU icon does not appear in the system tray, it can be started by going to
[Start] -> All Programs, and clicking on Fujitsu Driver Update; this will create the icon automatically. To invoke the FDU menu, right-click on the FDU icon. The menu contains the following items:
Check for updates now Allows for manual driver update search. The first time it is used, you are prompted to agree to a user agreement. After clicking on the icon, the FDU auto-
matically connects with the Fujitsu site to check for updates and downloads them. While downloading, the icon has a red bar through it, indicating that it cannot be used while the download is in process. When the update is complete, a message appears informing you of the fact. Enable Automatic Update Notifications Automatically searches for new updates on a regular basis (approximately every 3 days). Show update history Brings up a screen that displays a history of updates that have been made via the FDU. About Fujitsu Driver Update Displays the FDU version number and copyright information Fujitsu Driver Update Readme Displays the FDU readme. 61 P Series.book Page 62 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e 62
1 2 | Revised Users Manual2 | Users Manual | 1.59 MiB |
P Series.book Page 63 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 6 Care and Maintenance 63 P Series.book Page 64 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S i x 64 P Series.book Page 65 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Care and Maintenance If you use your LifeBook P Series notebook carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the notebook and its devices. Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operations of this product or similar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical products and do not permit them to handle any cables. LIFEBOOK P SERIES NOTEBOOK Caring for your LifeBook Your notebook is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with care. Do not use excessive force when tapping or writing on the screen with the stylus or your finger. Use of excessive force could result in damage to the LCD and/or Touch Screen. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. To protect your notebook from damage and to opti-
mize system performance, be sure to keep all air all vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the notebook in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Any unauthorized service performed on the computer will void the warranty. Always follow installation instructions closely. Keep it away from food and beverages. If you accidentally spill liquid on your notebook:
1. Turn it off. 2. Position it so that the liquid can run out. 3. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. If your notebook will not boot after it has dried 4. out, call your support representative. Do not use your notebook in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your notebook. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e Do not expose your notebook to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F
(60 C) may damage your notebook. Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your notebook in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid. Do not drop your notebook. Do not touch the screen with any sharp objects. Cleaning your LifeBook Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your notebook with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Storing your LifeBook If storing your notebook for a month or longer, turn the notebook off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. Store your notebook and batteries separately. If you store your notebook with a battery installed, the bat-
tery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery might damage the notebook. Store your notebook in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13 F (-25 C) and 140 F (60 C). Traveling with your LifeBook Do not transport your notebook while it is turned on. Do not check your notebook as baggage. Carry it with you. When traveling with the hard drive removed, wrap the drive in a non-conducting materials (cloth or paper). If you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install the drive if needed. Never put your hard drive through a metal detector. Have your hard drive hand-
inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your hard drive through a properly tuned X-ray machine. Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. 65 P Series.book Page 66 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S i x Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, Mexico, parts of Latin America, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand Figure 6-1. Outlet types KEYBOARD Caring for your Keyboard The keyboard of your computer is a very sensitive instrument. It is made up of many switches that are activated when you press on the keys. The keyboard is a major component of the heat dissipation system in a notebook. Due to heat and size considerations the keyboard is not sealed. Because the keys are so close together, it is not easy for the user to see when liquids have fallen onto the circuitry below the keys. Attempting to clean the keyboard with a spray on cleaner or rag soaked with cleaner the liquid can drip onto the circuitry sight unseen. Once the liquid seeps between the layers of circuitry, it can cause corrosion or other damage to the circuits. This can result in keys which no longer operate, or which, when pressed, record the wrong characters and other similar failures. There is no repair for this problem other than replace-
ment. The solution is to become aware of the issue and take appropriate steps to protect your keyboard. To clean the keyboard, use a rag dampened slightly with cleaning solution. Use extreme care to prevent liquid from dripping between the keys. Spraying directly on the keys should be avoided. The spray should be applied first to the cloth, and then the cloth wiped over the keys. BATTERIES Caring for your Batteries Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they 66 may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incin-
erate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than six months without recharging it. Increasing Battery Life Keep brightness to the lowest comfortable level. Set the power management for maximum battery life. Put your notebook in Standby mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Disable the Windows CD auto insert function. Always use fully charged batteries. OPTIONAL FLOPPY DISK DRIVE AND FLOPPY DISKS Caring for your Floppy Disks Avoid using floppy disks in damp and dusty locations. Never store a floppy disk near a magnet or magnetic field. Do not use a pencil or an eraser on a disk or disk label. Avoid storing the floppy disks in extremely hot or cold locations, or in locations subject to severe temperature changes. Store at temperatures between 50 F (10 C) and 125 F (52 C). Do not touch the exposed part of the disk behind the metal shutter. Caring for your Optional Floppy Disk Drive To clean, wipe the floppy disk drive clean with a dry soft cloth, or with a soft cloth dampened with water or a solution of neutral detergent. Never use benzene, paint thinner or other volatile material. Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in extremely hot or cold locations, or in locations subject to severe temperature changes. Store at temperatures between 50 F (10 C) and 125 F (52 C). Keep the floppy disk drive out of direct sunlight and away from heating equipment. Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in locations subject to shock and vibration. Never use the floppy disk drive with any liquid, metal, or other foreign matter inside the drive or disk. Never disassemble or dismantle your floppy disk drive. P Series.book Page 67 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM OPTIONAL OPTICAL DRIVE AND DISCS Caring for your discs CDs and DVD discs are precision devices and will func-
tion reliably if given reasonable care. Always store your discs in their case when not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any discs in extreme temperatures. Do not bend discs or set heavy objects on them. Do not spill liquids on discs. Do not scratch discs. Do not put a label on discs. Do not get dust on discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a disc is subjected to a sudden change in tempera-
ture, cold to warm condensation may form on the sur-
face. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry discs. If a disc is dirty, use only a disc cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e Caring for your Optional Optical Drive Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:
The drive rotates the compact disk at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Use of a commercially-available lens cleaner kit is recommended to maintain the drive lens. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive. CF CARDS Caring for your CF Cards CF Cards are durable, but you must treat them with care. The documentation supplied with your CF Cards provides specific information for caring for the cards. When you dont have a CF Card installed in your system, you should be sure to install the CF Card slot inserts that came with your system. These will help to keep dust and dirt out of your system. 67 P Series.book Page 68 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S i x 68 P Series.book Page 69 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 7 Specifications 69 P Series.book Page 70 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S e v e n 70 P Series.book Page 71 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM S p e c i f i c a t i o n s Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your LifeBook P Series notebook. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. CONFIGURATION LABEL Your LifeBook P Series notebook has a configuration label located on the bottom. (See figure 2-8 on page 13 for location). This label contains specific information regarding the options youve chosen for your notebook. Following is an example label and information on how to read your own configuration label. Part Number Configuration ID LifeBook P Series notebook Specifications (Continued) BIOS ROM Hard disk drive 1 MB (Boot Block Type Flash ROM)
1.8 HDD
30 GB or 60 GB IDE (4200 rpm) ATA 100
Shock-mounted
SMART Support Display Specifications Display 8.9" TFT WSVGA (1024 x600), 16M colors:
Configuration P/N: APZXXXXXXXXXXXXX FPC P/N: FPCMXXXXXX P1500, PM ULV 753, 8.9 WSVGA, 256M, 60G, MODEM/LAN/WLAN, WIN XP Processor Memory Communications Model Screen Size Hard Drive Operating System VRAM Figure 7-1. Configuration Label LifeBook P Series notebook Specifications The specifications for your particular model may vary. To determine the specifications for your system, please visit our Web site at: us.fujitsu.com/computers. Integrated Interfaces Physical Specifications Dimensions 9.13 w x 6.57 d x 1.36" / 1.46"
(232 mm x 167 mm x 34.5/37 mm) Processing Specifications CPU/Speed Intel Pentium M ULV 753 Front Side Bus (FSB) 400 MHz Chip set 915GMS Main RAM Memory/Storage Specifications
256 MB SDRAM (DDR2 400 MHz)
172-pin Micro DIMM slot 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1.0 GB modules available, with a system maximum of 1.0 GB. L1 cache
(CPU) 64 KB on-die L2 cache 2 MB on-die
Color LCD
Active Digitizer
32-bit color
External monitor support: SXGA
(1280x1024 maximum)
Dot pitch: 0.240 x 0.240 mm Up to 128 MB of shared memory using Unified Memory Architecture
(UMA). Dynamically responds to application requirements and allocates the proper amount of memory for optimal graphics and performance. Interface Specifications
Modem (RJ-11)
LAN (RJ-45)
USB 2.0 x 2
DC-In
Analog RGB, Mini D-SUB 15-pin connector for external VGA monitor
Docking connector Interfaces on Optional Port Replicator
DC Power
LAN (RJ-45)
15-pin D-SUB connector for external VGA monitor
USB 2.0 x 2
Docking Port CF Card Slot Dedicated slot for Compact Flash Card, Type II SD Slot Dedicated slot for SD Card User Interface support
Keyboard Pitch: 19 mm, Stroke: 3 mm
Quick Point pointing device with scroll button
Passive digitizer with pen input
On-screen keyboard 71 P Series.book Page 72 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S e v e n LifeBook P Series notebook Specifications (Continued) LifeBook P Series notebook Specifications (Continued) Audio User Controls Status Indicators
(LCDs) Main Battery Optional Battery Agency Approval Specifications
EN55022 (CISPR22) Class B
FCC 15, Class B
FCC 15C, 15.247
ICES-003
Canada RSS-210
ETSI EN 300 328-1 V1.3.1 : 2001
ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.2.1 :
2001_12
ETSI EN 301 498-17 V1.2.1 : 2002
ETSI EN 301 498-1 V1.4.1 : 2002 Emissions Immunity
EN55024 (1998) Safety Telecom
UL and cUL Listed, UL 60950
FCC Part 68
IC CS-03 Additional Specifications Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP Pro
Realtek ALC203
Internal mono microphone
Mono speaker
Mono microphone and stereo headphone jacks
26 adjustable audio levels
Programmable Application Buttons, each with primary and secondary functions (default applications:
Calculator and WordPad)
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support (on some models)
Suspend/Resume button
Power
Battery charging
Battery level
Hard disk drive
Caps Lock
Num Lock
Scroll Lock Power Specifications
3-cell
Removable, Lithium ion
10.8 V @2600 mAh, max. 28 WHr
Recharge Time:
Approximately 2.5 hours
6-cell
Removable, Lithium ion
10.8V @ 5200 mAh, max. 56.0 WHr
Recharge Time:
Approximately 4.5 hours AC Adapter Autosensing 100 - 240V, supplying 16 VDC, with a current of 2.5 A Temperature Humidity Environmental Specifications Operating: 41o to 95o F (5o to 35o C) Non-operating: 5o to 140o F
(-15o to 60o C) Operating:
20 to 85% non-condensing Non-operating:
8 to 85% non-condensing 72 P Series.book Page 73 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Regulatory Information Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a partic-
ular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. Notice to Users of the US Telephone Network This equipment contains an internal modem that complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the tele-
phone company. This equipment is designed to be connected to the tele-
phone network or premises wiring using a standard jack type USOC RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. The ringer equivalent number (REN) of this equipment is 0.1B as shown on the label. The REN is used to deter-
mine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone may R e g u l a t o r y I n f o r m a t i o n result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local tele-
phone company. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facili-
ties, equipment, operations or procedures that could effect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to main-
tain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please refer to the manual or contact Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation, Customer Service. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission, public service commis-
sion or corporation commission for information). If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this computer does not disable your alarm equip-
ment. If you have any questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date an time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such busi-
ness, other entity, or individual. 73 P Series.book Page 74 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n S e v e n DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network NOTICE: This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number
(4061A-8687) signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this equipment to the local telecommunication facilities. The user should be aware that compliance with the certifica-
tion standards does not prevent service degradation in some situations. Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Fujitsu or any equipment failures may give the telecom-
munication company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment from the telephone line. NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1B. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equiva-
lence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. For safety, users should ensure that the electrical ground of the power utility, the telephone lines and the metallic water pipes are connected together. Users should NOT attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appro-
priate electric inspection authority or elec-
trician. This may be particularly important in rural areas. 74 Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Rseau Tlphonique Canadien AVIS: Le prsent matriel est conforme aux spcifica-
tions techniques dIndustrie Canada applicables au matriel terminal. Cette conformit est confirme par le numro denregistrement. Le sigle IC, plac devant le numro denregistrement (4061A-8687), signifie que lenregistrement sest effectu conformment une dclaration de conformit et indique que les spcifica-
tions techniques dIndustrie Canada ont t respectes. Il nimplique pas quIndustrie Canada a approuv le matriel. Avant de connecter cet quipement une ligne tlpho-
nique, lutilisateur doit vrifier sil est permis de connecter cet quipement aux installations de tlcom-
munications locales. Lutilisateur est averti que mme la conformit aux normes de certification ne peut dans certains cas empcher la dgradation du service. Les rparations de lquipement de tlcommunications doivent tre eVectues par un service de maintenance agr au Canada. Toute rparation ou modification, qui nest pas expressment approuve par Fujitsu, ou toute dfaillance de lquipement peut entraner la compagnie de tlcommunications exiger que lutilisateur dcon-
necte lquipement de la ligne tlphonique. AVIS: Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du prsent matriel est de 0.1B. LIES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquiva-
lence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5. Pour assurer la scurit, les utilisateurs doivent vrifier que la prise de terre du ser-
vice dlectricit, les lignes tlphoniques et les conduites deau mtalliques sont con-
nectes ensemble. Les utilisateurs NE doivent PAS tenter dtablir ces connex-
ions eux-mmes, mais doivent contacter les services dinspection dinstallations lectriques appropris ou un lectricien. Ceci peut tre particulirement important en rgions rurales. P Series.book Page 75 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM 8 Glossary 75 P Series.book Page 76 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n E i g h t 76 P Series.book Page 77 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your note-
book. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. AdHoc A designation for wireless LAN network configuration. It indicates a form of communication limited to those personal computers which have wireless LAN function. For details, refer to Ad hoc mode on page 86. ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line Technology for transporting high bit-rate services over ordinary phone lines. Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an auto-
mobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your notebook. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your notebook when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Infor-
mation from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your notebook. Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. G l o s s a r y Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. CardBus A faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interface which offers performance similar to the 32-bit PCI architecture. CD-ROM Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. Channel The frequency band of wireless LAN to be used in communications over wireless LAN or at the access point. CMOS RAM Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing random access memory which requires very low levels of power to operate. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. CRT Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by varying the position and intensity of the beam. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. 77 P Series.book Page 78 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n E i g h t DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A protocol used for automatically fetching communica-
tion parameters such as IP addresses. The side which assigns IP address is called DHCP server and the side that is assigned it is called DHCP client. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. If the platter is very stiff it is a hard drive, if it is highly flexible it is a floppy disk, if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter it is commonly called a diskette. Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data on the disk. Diskette A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter. DMA Direct Memory Access Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software components, and peripherals. DNS Domain Name System A function that controls the correspondence of IP addresses assigned to a computer with the name. Even for those computers whose IP addresses are unknown, if their names are known, it is possible to communicate with them. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. 78 ECP Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices. Encryption Key (Network Key) Key information used to encode data for data transfer. This device uses the same encryption key to encode and decode the data, and the identical encryption key is required between the sender and receiver. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of elec-
tricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example: the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. Extended Memory All memory more than the 640KB recognized by MS-DOS as system memory. FCC Federal Communication Commission. Floppy Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media which is highly flexible. GB Gigabyte. Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is very stiff. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your notebook in electronic form. I/O Port The connector and associated control circuits for data entering and leaving your notebook in electronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive which is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE 1394 Industry standard that allows you to connect between your notebook and a peripheral device such as a digital camera. Also known as Firewire or iLINK. P Series.book Page 79 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM IEEE802.11a One of the wireless LAN standards prescribed by the 802 committee in charge of establishing standards of LAN technology in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Elec-
tronic Engineers). This standard allows communica-
tions at the maximum speed of 54 Mbps by using a 5 GHz band which can freely be used without radio communication license. IEEE802.11b One of the wireless LAN standards prescribed by 802 committee in charge of establishing standards of LAN technology in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Elec-
tronic Engineers). It allows communications at the maximum speed of 11 Mbps by a band of 2.4 GHz (ISM band) which can freely be used without radio communi-
cation license. IEEE802.11g One of the wireless LAN standards prescribed by 802 committee in charge of establishing standards of LAN technology in IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Elec-
tronic Engineers). It allows communications at the maximum speed of 54 Mbps by a band of 2.4 GHz (ISM band) which can freely be used without radio communi-
cation license. Infrared Light just beyond the red portion of the visible light spectrum which is invisible to humans. Infrastructure A designation of Wireless LAN network configurations. It indicates a form of communication using an Access Point. For details, refer to Infrastructure connection on page 86. IP Address An address used for computers to communicate in the TCP/IP environment. Current IPv4 (version 4) uses four values in the range between 1 and 255. (Example: 192.168.100.123). G l o s s a r y IRQ Interrupt Request An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. LAN Local Area Network An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-
time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. LPT Port Line Printer Port. A way of referring to parallel interface ports because historically line printers were the first and latter the most common device connected to parallel ports. MAC Address Media Access Control Address A unique physical address of a network card. For Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining three bytes are controlled by each vendor (preventing overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique physical address in the world, being assigned with a different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames are sent and received based on this address. There are two types of IP address: global address and private address. MB Megabyte. The global address is an only address in the world. It is controlled by JPNIC (Japan Network Information Center). A private address is an only address in the closed network. IR An abbreviation for infrared. IrDA Infrared Data Association. An organization which produces standards for communication using infrared as the carrier. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your notebooks CPU. MHz Megahertz. 79 P Series.book Page 80 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n E i g h t MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of information between computers and sound producers such as synthesizers. Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. MPU-401 A standard for MIDI interfaces and connectors. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time through the Internet or other networks. You can set a smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication, if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact that the maximum size is too large. Network authentication The method of authentication performed by wireless LAN clients to connect with the access point. There are two types: open system authentication and shared key authentication. The type of authentication must be set to each client and also coincide with the setting of access point with which to communicate. Network authentica-
tion is sometimes called authentication mode. Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communi-
cation. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Security Set Identifier) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). In order to improve security, the network key is set allowing no communication unless Network name
(SSID) coincides with the network key. NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Open system authentication One of network authentication types for wireless LAN. Since there is no check of network key upon authentica-
tion, clients can connect to the access point without submitting correct network keys. However, in case of 80 actual communications, the same network key must be set. Open system authentication is sometimes called Open key authentication. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of micro-
processor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. PCMCIA PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association is an organization that sets standards for add-in cards for personal computers. Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your notebook. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation can not continue, the operating system will not be loaded. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol
(PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. Program An integrated set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. P Series.book Page 81 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Protocol Procedures and rules use to send and receive data between computers.
- Method of sending and receiving data
- Process used to handle communication errors Conditions required for communication are organized in procedures for correct transfer of information. RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your notebook that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Restart See Reset. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your notebook this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which infor-
mation is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way can not be changed by your notebook and does not require power to maintain it. SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Serial Port A connection to another device through which data is transferred one bit at a time on a single wire with any other wires only for control of the device not for transfer of data. Shared key authentication One of the network authentication types for wireless LAN. Upon authentication, the access point checks whether the same network key is set to the client. If the client uses a wrong network key or the network key itself is not set, authentication is unsuccessful, allowing no communications with the access point. SMART Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology
(SMART) is an emerging technology that provides near-
term failure predictions for hard drives. When SMART G l o s s a r y is enabled the hard drive monitors pre-determined drive attributes that are susceptible to degradation over time. If a failure is likely to occur, SMART makes a status report available so that the notebook can prompt the user to back up the data on the drive. Naturally not all failures are predictable. SMART predictability is limited to those attributes which the drive can self-monitor. In those cases where SMART can give advance warning, a considerable amount of precious data can be saved. SRAM Static random access memory. A specific technology of making RAM which does not require periodic data refreshing. SSID Service Set Identifier Specifies which network you are joining. Some systems allow you to specify any SSID as an option so you can join any network. Standby To make inoperative for a period of time. Your notebook uses various suspension states to reduce power consumption and prolong the charge of your battery. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your notebook this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. SVGA Super VGA. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchro-
nizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used. 81 P Series.book Page 82 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n E i g h t TFT Thin Film Transistor A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organiza-
tion that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. USB Universal Serial Bus. Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices, printers, and keyboards to your computer. VGA Video Graphics Array. A video display standard originally introduced by IBM with the PS/2 series of personal computers. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Identifies that the product has passed the interoperability test, supplied by the WECA
(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guar-
antees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. For more information on the Wi-Fi standard, go to the WECA website at: www.wirelessethernet.com. WLAN Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. Write Protect Prevent alteration of the binary state of all bits in a storage media. Example: all information on a device such as a floppy diskette; a block of space in a storage media such as a partition of a hard drive; a file or direc-
tory of floppy diskette or hard drive. XGA Extended VGA. 82 P Series.book Page 83 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Appendix A Integrated Wireless LAN* Users Guide
*Optional Device 83 P Series.book Page 84 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A 84 P Series.book Page 85 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Wireless L A N Us er s Gu id e FCC REGULATORY INFORMATION Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or envi-
ronments, such as:
On board an airplane, or
In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private build-
ings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not respon-
sible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitu-
tion or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attach-
ment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunc-
tion with any other antenna or transmitter. For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of the device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2. 3. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wilreless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high level of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-
level RF exposure have not found any biological effects, Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. The maximum SAR value measured from the devices are:
2.4GHz - band: 0.182 W/kg
5.25GHz - band: 1.35 W/kg
5.8GHz - band: 0.794 W/kg at Body Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly autho-
rized by Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation may invali-
date the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. High power radars are allocated as primary users of 5250-
5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LELAN (license-
exempt LAN) devices operating in these bands. 85 P Series.book Page 86 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A Before Using the Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to prop-
erly setup and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure it's correct opera-
tion. Keep this manual in a safe place for future refer-
ence. Wireless LAN Devices Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing an Atheros AR5006XS (WLL4070) Mini-PCI wireless network card Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. It is a dual-band radio that operates in two license-free RF bands, therefore eliminating the need to procure an FCC license to operate. It operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band. Additionally, the Atheros device operates in the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The Atheros Super AG WLAN is capable of three oper-
ating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g, wireless LAN standards governed by the IEEE (Institute of Electronics and Electrical Engi-
neers). Encoding of data is modulated using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Complementary Code Keying (CCK) when the WLAN device is operating in IEEE 802.11b mode and Orthogonal Frequency Divi-
sion Multiplexing (OFDM) when operating in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode. The WLAN device is Wi-Fi certified and operates at the maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network The maximum communication range indoors is approximately 80 feet (25 meters). However, that range will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or inter-
ference from external RF sources. The WLAN device supports the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. WIRELESS LAN MODES USING THIS DEVICE Ad Hoc Mode
(See Figure A-1)
"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID (service set identi-
fier), network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode
(See Figure A-2) Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network archi-
tecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infra-
structure mode because they require access to the wired LAN in order to access computers, devices, and services such as file servers, printers, and databases. 86 P Series.book Page 87 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e How to Handle This Device The WLAN device comes pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The Oper-
ating System that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. DEACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE Deactivation of the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). Fujitsu mobile computers employ two methods with which to deactivate the WLAN device:
WIRELESS NETWORK CONSIDERATIONS The Atheros WLAN device supports IEEE802.11a/b/g and operates in the 2.4GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz UNII bands. The maximum range of the WLAN device indoors is typically 80 feet (25 meters). Please note that the max-
imum range you achieve may be shorter or longer than 80 feet, depending on factors such as access point transmit power, number and density of obstructions, or external RF interference. Microwave ovens will interfere with the operation of WLAN device as microwave ovens operate in the same 2.4GHz frequency range that IEEE802.11b/g devices operate in. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4GHz fre-
quency range may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and large amounts of frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure the proper operation of the WLAN device. Figure A-2. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network Using the Wireless On/Off Switch, or, In Windows, using the Atheros Client Utility software. Deactivation using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and effi-
ciently by toggling the Wireless On/Off Switch to the Off position. (Figure A-3) The wireless On/Off switch has no effect on non-Wire-
less LAN models
. Wireless LAN Switch Figure A-3. Wireless LAN On/Off Switch Location Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*
Wireless LAN
*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. 87 P Series.book Page 88 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A Deactivation using Atheros Client Utility software Click [Start] -> [Program Files] -> [Atheros] ->
1. Atheros Client Utility. 2. Choose Action and click Disable Radio. ACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows using the Atheros software See Configu-
ration Using Atheros Client Utility Software on page 89. 88 P Series.book Page 89 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Configuration of the WLAN Device The optional WLAN device can be configured to estab-
lish wireless network connectivity using the Atheros Client Utility software. The Atheros Client Utility soft-
ware allows for multiple profile setups and supports automatic profile switching. Support for most industry standard security solutions, as well as Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX), is contained in this software. FLOW OF OPERATIONS 1. Activate the WLAN Device (See Activating the WLAN Device on page 88 for more information). 2. Configure the Wireless Network Key parameters
(See Configuration Using Atheros Client Utility Software on page 89 for more information). Enter the network name (SSID) Choose the appropriate WLAN architecture (Ad Hoc or Infrastructure) otherwise Click the [New] button. The Profile Management dialog displays. 5. 6. From the General tab, enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. Enter the network SSID, in the SSID1 field. If you wish to create a profile that can connect to up to 3 different wireless networks, SSID's can be entered in the SSID2 and SSID3 fields as well. 7. Click the Security tab. 8. The Security tab allows for the configuration of the Security modes listed in the table below. Please select the radio button of the desired security mode. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Field Name Description Choose Authentication method: Open, Shared, WPA/WPA2 WPA, or WPA-PSK If using static WEP keys, enter static WEP key and choose key index. 3. Configure network settings TCP/IP settings Workgroup or Domain settings. CONFIGURATION USING ATHEROS CLIENT UTILITY SOFTWARE This section explains the procedure to properly configure the WLAN device using the Atheros Client Utility. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network adminis-
trator for these parameters:
Network Name: Also known as the SSID Network Key (WEP): Required if using static WEP keys. Authentication Type: Open, Shared, WPA, or WPA-PSK Procedure 1. Activate the WLAN device using either the Wireless On/Off Switch or the Atheros Client Utility WPA/WPA2 Passphrase 802.1x Pre-Shared Key Enables the use of Wi-Fi Protected Access. Choosing WPA opens the WPA EAP drop-down menu. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Enables WPA-Pre-Shared Key. Click on the Configure button to enter the WPA Passphrase. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Enables 802.1x security. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Choosing this option opens the 802.1x EAP type drop-down menu. Enables the use of pre-shared keys that are defined on both the access point and the station. This is where static WEP keys are entered. Click the Configure button to fill in the Define Pre-Shared Keys window. None No security 2. Click [Start] -> Programs -> Atheros -> Atheros 9. Click [OK]. Client Utility. 3. Click the Profile Management tab. 4. If this is your first time using this utility, highlight the profile [Default] and Click the [Modify] button, 10. Click the Advanced tab. 11. The Advanced tab allows for the configuration of the options detailed in the table below. 89 P Series.book Page 90 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A Field Name Description Power Save Mode Network Type 802.11b Preamble Options are Maximum, Normal, or Off Options are AP (Infrastructure) or Ad Hoc Specifies the preamble setting in 802.11b. The default setting is Short and Long (Access Point mode), which allows both short and long headers in the 802.11b frames. Set to Long Only to override allowing short frames. Transmit Power Level Select the desired transmit power level from the dropdown list. Wireless Mode Wireless Mode when Starting Ad Hoc Network Specifies 5 GHz 54 Mbps, 2.4 GHz 11 Mbps, or 2.4 GHz 54 Mbps oper-
ation in an access point network. Specifies 5GHz 54 Mbps, 5 GHz 108 Mbps, or 2.4 GHz 11 Mbps to start an Ad Hoc network if no matching network name is found after scan-
ning all available modes. 12. Click [OK]. 13. If the profile you just created does not activate immediately, click the Profile Management tab, highlight the desired Profile, and click Activate. 14. Click [OK] to close the Atheros Client Utility. CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK This section explains connection to the network. If there is an administrator of the network, contact the network administrator for data settings. Setting the network Perform the Setting TCP/IP and Confirming the computer and work group names operations required for network connection. Setting TCP/IP To change the setting of the IP address, you need to be logged in from Windows as an administrator. 3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-
rently installed networks will be displayed. 4. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Proper-
ties] window will be displayed. 5. Click the [General] tab if it is not already selected. 6. Click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP] and then click
[Properties]. The [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] window will be displayed. 7. Set the IP address as follows:
For ad hoc connection: Select [Use the following IP address:] and then enter data for [IP address]
and [Subnet mask]. See page 96 for IP address setting. For access point (infrastructure) connection: If your network uses DHCP, select [Obtain an IP address automatically] and [Obtain DNS server address automatically]. If your network uses static IP addresses, consult with your network adminis-
trator for the correct IP address settings. 8. Click the [OK] button. Processing will return to the
[Wireless Network Connection Properties] window. 9. Click the [OK] button. 10. Close the [Network Connection] window. Following this operation, confirm the names of the computer and the workgroup as follows. Confirming the computer and work group names To modify the computer name and/or the work group name, you need to be logged in from Windows as an administrator. 1. Click the [Start] button, then [Control Panel]. 2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 3. Double-click the [System] icon. The [System Prop-
erties] window will be displayed. 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control 4. Click the [Computer Name] tab. Panel]. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 2. 90 5. Confirm the settings of [Full computer name:] and
[Workgroup:]. a. The setting of [Full computer name:] denotes the name for identifying the computer. Any name can be assigned for each personal computer. P Series.book Page 91 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM To change the name, click [Change] and then proceed in accordance with the instruction messages displayed on the screen. Enter the desired name in less than 15 ASCII character code format. Identifiability can be enhanced by entering the model number, the user name, and other factors. b. [Workgroup name] is the group name of the network. Enter the desired name in less than 15 ASCII character code format. For ad hoc connection: Assign the same network name to all personal computers existing on the network. For access point (infrastructure) connection:
Assign the name of the work group to be accessed. 6. Click the [OK] button. If a message is displayed that requests you to restart the personal computer, click [Yes] to restart the computer. Setting the sharing function Set the sharing function to make file and/or printer sharing with other network-connected personal computers valid. This operation is not required unless the sharing func-
tion is to be used. The folder and printer for which the sharing function has been set will be usable from any personal computer present on the network. To share a file and/or the connected printer, you need to be logged in as an administrator. Setting the Microsoft network-sharing service 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control Panel]. 2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-
rently installed networks will be displayed. 4. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Proper-
ties] window will be displayed. W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e 5. If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-
works] is displayed, proceed to step 6. If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not dis-
played, skip to step 7. 6. Make sure that the [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] check box is checked, and then click the [OK] button. Skip to Setting file-
sharing function. 7. Click [Install]. The [Select Network Component Type] window will be displayed. 8. Click [Service], then click the [Add] button. The
[Select Network Service] window will be displayed. 9. Click [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-
works] and then click the [OK] button. Processing will return to the [Wireless Network Connection Properties] window, and [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] will be added to the list. 10. Click the [Close] button. Setting the file-sharing function The procedure for setting the file-sharing function follows, with the work folder in drive C: as an example. 1. Double-click [My Computer] on the desktop. 2. Double-click [Local disk (C:)]. 3. Right-click the work folder (or whichever folder you want to share), and then click [Sharing and Security...] in the menu displayed. The [Folder Name Properties] window will be displayed. Setting the file-sharing function for the file which has been used to execute Network Setup Wizard is suggested on the screen. For the wireless LAN, however, since security is guaranteed by entry of the network name (SSID) and the network key, the steps to be taken to set the file-
sharing function easily without using Network Setup Wizard are given below. 4. Click [Sharing] if it isnt already selected. 5. Click the link stating If you understand the secu-
rity risks, but want to share files without running the wizard, click here. 6. Click Just enable file sharing and click [OK]. 7. Check the [Share this folder on the network] check box. 91 P Series.book Page 92 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A To specify the corresponding folder as a read-only folder, select the [Read only]
checkbox under the General tab. 8. Click the [OK] button. The folder will be set as a sharable folder, and the display of the icon for the work folder will change. Setting the printer-sharing function 1. Click [Start] -> Settings and then [Printers and Faxes]. A list of connected printers will be dis-
played. 2. Right-click the printer for which the sharing func-
tion is to be set, and then click [Sharing] in the menu displayed. The property window correspond-
ing to the selected printer will be displayed. Setting the printer-sharing function when Network Setup Wizard has been executed is suggested on the screen. For the wireless LAN, however, since security is guaranteed by entry of the network name (SSID) and the network key, the steps to be taken to set the printer-sharing function without using Network Setup Wizard are laid down below. 3. Click the [Sharing] tab. 4. Click [Share this printer]. 5. Enter the sharing printer name in [Share name]. 6. Click the [OK] button. Confirming connection After you have finished the network setup operations, access the folder whose sharing has been set for other personal computers. Also, confirm the status of the radio waves in case of trouble such as a network connection failure. In the case of access point (infrastructure) connection, enter the necessary data for the access point before confirming connection. Refer to the manual of the access point for the access point setup procedure. Connecting your personal computer to another personal computer 1. Click [Start] first and then [My Computer]. The
[My Computer] window will be displayed in the left frame. 92 2. Click [My Network Places] in the Other Places list. The window [My Network Places] will be dis-
played. 3. Click [View workgroup computers] under Network Tasks in the left frame. 4. Double-click the personal computer to which your personal computer is to be connected. The folder that was specified in Setting the file-sharing func-
tion on page 91 will be displayed. 5. Double-click the folder to be accessed. Confirming the status of the radio 1. Right-click the Atheros icon in the lower right cor-
ner of the screen. 2. Click [Open Atheros Client Utility]. The Atheros Client Utility window opens. 3. Contained within the Current Status and Profile Management tabs, you will find the current operat-
ing status of the radio. (When the radio is turned off or the computer is not yet connected, some of the conditions will not be displayed.) Among the information displayed are the follow-
ing:
Network Name (SSID) Displays the Network Name (SSID) currently used by the radio. Profile Name The current configuration profile is displayed. Mode Displays the current operating mode. [Infra-
structure (AP)] or [Ad Hoc] will be displayed. Data Encryption Displays the current security status of the profile being used:
None: No encryption used. WEP: WEP encryption algorithm used. CKIP: WEP encryption algorithm used. TKIP: WEP encryption algorithm used. Signal Strength Displays the current strength of the signal being received by the radio. Current Channel Displays the current transmit and receive channel being used. Radio Status Displays the current status of the radio. P Series.book Page 93 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Troubleshooting the WLAN W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set the network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after short-
ening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better sight. To check the wave condition, refer to the following page: Confirming the status of the radio on page 92. Check if the wireless switch is turned ON. Also verify Disable Radio is not checked in Network setting window. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Wireless network authentication has failed Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Incorrectly configured network settings Recheck the configuration of your network settings. For the method of checking, refer to the following page:Connection to the Network on page 90. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 93 P Series.book Page 94 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A Wireless LAN Glossary GLOSSARY Ad Hoc Mode Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. For details, refer to Ad hoc connection on page 86. Channel Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) A protocol that provides a means to dynamically allocate IP addresses to computers on a local area network. DNS (Domain Name System) A data query service that provides a mechanism with which to translate host names into Internet addresses. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. IP address The logical 32-bit host address defined by the Internet Protocol that uniquely identifies a computer on a network. The IP address is usually expressed in dotted decimal notation. LAN (Local Area Network) A LAN or Local Area Network is a computer network (or data communications network) which is confined to a limited geographical area. 94 MAC address (Media Access Control Address) A MAC address (also called an Ethernet address or IEEE MAC address) is the 48-bit address (typically written as twelve hexadecimal digits, 0 through 9 and A through F, or as six hexadecimal numbers separated by periods or colons, e.g., 0080002012ef, 0:80:0:2:20:ef) which uniquely identifies a computer that has an Ethernet interface. MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) The maximum size of data which can be transmitted at one time in networks including the Internet. In an envi-
ronment whose maximum size of data is too large to correctly receive data, normal communications can be restored by setting the size of MTU to a smaller value. Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communi-
cation. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). In order to improve security, the network key is set allowing no communication unless Network name
(SSID) coincides with the network key. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 stan-
dard that performs no authentication checks on a wire-
less client before allowing it to associate. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) A method of allowing the authentication protocol adopted in telephone line connection (PPP) to be used over an Ethernet. Protocol A procedure or rule of delivering data among computers. Ordered data communication is allowed by making all conditions required for communication including the method of data transmission/reception and actions upon communication errors into proce-
dures. W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e P Series.book Page 95 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentica-
tion is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-text challenge and the same chal-
lenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the WEP key. SSID (Service Set Identifier) Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A standard protocol of the Internet. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi, or Wireless Fidelity, is a set of standards for wire-
less local area networks (WLAN) based on the IEEE 802.11 specifications. Certified products can use the official Wi-Fi logo, which indicates that the product is interoperable with any other product also showing that logo. 95 P Series.book Page 96 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A IP address information ABOUT IP ADDRESSES IP addressing is much more complicated than can be briefly explained in this document. You are advised to consult with your network administrator for additional information. If IP address is unknown, set IP address as follows, or, If you have an access point (DHCP server) on the network, set the IP address as follows:
[Obtain an IP address automatically]
A DHCP server is a server that automatically assigns IP addresses to computers or other devices in the network. There is no DHCP server for the AdHoc network. If the IP address is already assigned to the computer in the network, ask the network administrator to check the IP address to be set for the computer. If no access point is found in the network:
An IP address is expressed with four values in the range between 1 and 255. Set the each computer as follows: The value in paren-
theses is a subnet mask.
<Example>
Computer A: 192.168.100.2 (255.255.255.0) Computer B: 192.168.100.3 (255.255.255.0) Computer C: 192.168.100.4 (255.255.255.0)
Computer X: 192.168.100.254 (255.255.255.0) 96 P Series.book Page 97 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM W i r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Specifications Item Specification Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Number of channels Security Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) Atheros Super AG (802.11a+b/g) WLAN device conforms to IEEE 802.11a and 802.11b/g (Wi-Fi based)*
(Automatic switching) IEEE 802.11a/g: 54 Mbps maximum data rate (108 Mbps maximum data rate with compatible access points) The access point must be set to channel 6 only, and must have Atheros chip set to support this mode. IEEE 802.11b: 11 Mbps maximum data rate 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 5050 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES**
WPA 1.0 compliant Encryption Key lengths Supported: 64 bits, 128 bits, and 152 bits
(Atheros module using AES encryption only) 802.1x/EAP CCX 2.0 compliant 10 units or less ***
* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.
** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/
104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.
*** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 97 P Series.book Page 98 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - A p p e n d i x A 98 P Series.book Page 99 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Appendix B Using the Fingerprint Swipe Sensor 99 P Series.book Page 100 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k T S e r i e s T a b l e t P C - A p p e n d i x B 100 P Series.book Page 101 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Fingerprint Sensor Device INTRODUCING THE FINGERPRINT SENSOR DEVICE Your system has a fingerprint sensor device in the loca-
tion shown in the figure below. Figure A-1 Fingerprint sensor With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:
Log onto Windows Recover from suspend mode Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into homepages that require a username and pass-
word After you have enrolled - or registered - your finger-
print, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-
protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. GETTING STARTED This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. F I n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r U s e r s G u i d e INSTALLING OMNIPASS If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 102. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:
The presence of the gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The presence of the Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:
Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP Profes-
sional or Windows 2000 operating system At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 102. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. For installation, OmniPass requires that the user installing OmniPass have administrative privileges to the system. If your current user does not have administrative privileges, log out and then log in with an administrator user before proceeding with OmniPass installation. To install OmniPass on your system you must:
1. Insert the installation media for the OmniPass appli-
cation into the appropriate drive. If you are installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must find and launch the OmniPass installation program
(setup.exe) from the media. 2. Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass installation program. Specify a location to which you would like OmniPass installed. It is recom-
mended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root directory (e.g. C:\). 3. Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. The installation program automatically places an icon
(Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. 101 P Series.book Page 102 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k T S e r i e s T a b l e t P C - A p p e n d i x B Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. To check the version information of OmniPass:
1. From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-
shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Click the Start button, select Settings, and click Control Panel (if you are using Windows XP you will see the Control Panel directly in the Start menu;
click it, then click Switch to Classic View). Double-
click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2. Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass Control Panel. The About tab window appears with version information about OmniPass. Uninstalling OmniPass For uninstallation, OmniPass requires that the user uninstalling OmniPass have administrative privileges to the system. If your current user does not have administrative privileges, log out and then log in with an administrator user before proceeding with OmniPass uninstallation. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:
1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings, and then Control Panel. 2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 3. Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4. Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5. Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. USER ENROLLMENT Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials 102 to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of creden-
tials that you have to remember. During OmniPass user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system
(his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password tablet), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John were to go to an Internet cafe to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and tablet) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than where he enrolled that OmniPass user, he will not gain access. The basic enrollment procedure assumes you have no hardware authentication devices or alternate storage locations that you wish to integrate with OmniPass. If you desire such functionality, consult the appropriate sections after reviewing this section. Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified other-
wise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex;
click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. 1. Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2. Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This will become the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value P Series.book Page 103 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM will be your Windows computer name. In a corpo-
rate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. Refer to Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 103 for additional information. 3. 4. Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at least Prompt with system beeps only until you get accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next]
to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5. Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your system and streamline the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the authentication prompt to start device enrollment. 1. During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. 2. Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elon-
gated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. F I n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r U s e r s G u i d e 3. Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the finger-
print, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automati-
cally appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Veri-
fication Successful under the capture window. USING OMNIPASS You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentication procedures. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from standby or hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during pass-
word replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unse-
lected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the finger-
print capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or pass-
word protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. 103 P Series.book Page 104 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k T S e r i e s T a b l e t P C - A p p e n d i x B Go to a site that requires a login (username and pass-
word), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],
[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click this OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but do not click the
[Login] or [Submit] button. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three effective settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. This setting is more convenient in that whenever you go to a site remembered with this setting, you will bypass any authentication procedure and gain instant access to the site. But should you leave your system unattended with your OmniPass user logged in, anyone using your system can browse to your password protected sites and gain automatic access. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master pass-
word or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. 104 Click Finish to complete the remember password proce-
dure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Pass-
word Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master pass-
word prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. If a machine is locked and OmniPass detects a different user logging back in with a fingerprint, the first user will be logged out and the second user logged in. In Windows XP, your login options must be set either for classic login, or for fast user switching and logon screen to be enabled to use your fingerprint to log on to Windows. To change this go to Control Panel, select User Accounts and then click Change the way users log on or off. If your Windows screensaver is password protected, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to screensaver password dialog during resume. You can authenticate to your screensaver pass-
word prompt with your enrolled finger. Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-
ment; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Pass-
words under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. P Series.book Page 105 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM You can view the credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Pass-
word Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is the resetting of your Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, then the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm your password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt(s) and click OK and your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-
ment; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then click [Apply]. When you delete an identity, all of its associated remembered sites and password protected dialogs are lost. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply]
to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automati-
cally be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using "master password". F I n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r U s e r s G u i d e Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your user-
name in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password:
field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-
down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity you wish to login as and then click OK to login. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Iden-
tity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing pass-
words for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 104. CONFIGURING OMNIPASS This section gives an overview of both the Export/
Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users Using the OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and any enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. You should periodically export your user profile and store it in a safe place. If anything happens to your system, you can import your OmniPass profile to a new system and have all your remem-
bered settings and fingerprints instantly. You don't forget the Windows login credentials when exporting. When you examine the importation, you are prompted for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. 105 P Series.book Page 106 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k T S e r i e s T a b l e t P C - A p p e n d i x B Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authenti-
cation, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile You cannot import a user into OmniPass if there already is a user with the same name enrolled in OmniPass. To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass and then select OmniPass Import/Export File (*.opi) and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported (.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login cre-
dentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new sys-
tem. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sun-
shine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. 106 If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, pro-
vided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. OMNIPASS CONTROL CENTER This section will serve to explain functions within the OmniPass Control Center that werent explained earlier. You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of three ways:
Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-right cor-
ner of the desktop) Click the Start button; select the Programs group;
select the Softex program group; and click the OmniPass Control Center selection. Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-
click the Softex OmniPass icon. User Management The User Management tab has two major interfaces:
Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/
Export User functionality is documented in Exporting and Importing Users on page 105. Add/Remove User functionality is straightforward. If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment Wizard is documented in User Enrollment on page 102. If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user removal. Click OK to complete user removal. Removing a user will automatically destroy all OmniPass data associated with that user. All identities and credentials associated with the user will be lost. If you are sure about removing the user, we recommend you export the user profile. User Settings The User Settings tab has four interfaces: Audio Settings, Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow users to customize OmniPass to suit individual preferences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips) P Series.book Page 107 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM you can set how OmniPass notifies the user of OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied, etc.). The details of each setting under the Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-explanatory. The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll finger-
prints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional finger-
prints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authen-
ticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it should already be marked by a green check if you have a finger enrolled) and click Next. System Settings The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found in the System Settings tab. With these options you can specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your Windows Logon. The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your Windows login credentials. If the user logging into Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is appropriate for an office setting or any setting where users must enter a username and password to log into a computer. This is the default setting. With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you have logged on to Windows. With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be logged on. You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User from the right-click menu. TROUBLESHOOTING You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local secu-
rity settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access:
Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The F I n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r U s e r s G u i d e correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authen-
ticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the proce-
dure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank pass-
words to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied
(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:
Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 107 P Series.book Page 108 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k T S e r i e s T a b l e t P C - A p p e n d i x B 108 P Series.book Page 109 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM Index A AC adapter . 29 indicator . 14 plug adapters . 65 Anti-theft Lock Slot . 12 Auto/Airline Adapter . 29 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . 61 B Battery . 37 alarm . 37 care . 66 cold-swapping . 38 compartment . 13 conserving power . 32 dead . 54 faulty . 55 increasing life . 66 level indicators . 14 lithium ion battery . 37 low . 37 problems . 54, 55 recharging . 37 replacing . 38 shorted . 38 suspend mode . 37 battery release latch . 8 BIOS guide . 30 setup utility . 30 Boot Sequence . 30 Built-in Microphone . 13 Button Icons . 20 C CapsLock Indicator . 15 CD-ROM care . 67 Changing Button Functions . 21 Click Me! . 31 Closed Cover Switch . 9 Compact Flash Card . 42 Configuration Label . 13 Conventions used . 3 Cursor Keys . 18 I n d e x D DC Output Cable . 29 DC Power Jack . 8, 11, 29 Device Ports . 46 DIMM . 39 Display Panel . 9 brightness . 17 opening . 16 problems . 56, 57 Display Panel Latch . 9 Display Timeout . 33 Docking Port . 46 Drivers and Application Restore CD . 60 E Error Messages . 58 External Monitor Port . 12, 47 F FDU . 61 Floppy Disk care . 66 Fujitsu Driver Update utility . 61 Function Key F10 . 19 F3 . 19 F4 . 19 F5 . 19 F6 . 19 F7 . 19 F8 . 19 F9 . 19 FN . 19 Fn . 19 H Hard Disk Drive access indicator . 14 problems . 52 Hard Disk Timeout . 33 Headphone Jack . 8, 10, 46 Hibernate Mode . 33 I Installing a Memory Stick . 41 Internal LAN Jack . 46 109 P Series.book Page 110 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - I n d e x K Keyboard . 9, 18 cursor keys . 18 numeric keypad . 18 problems . 52 windows keys . 18 L LAN (RJ-45) Jack . 12 LifeBook Application Buttons . 9, 20 LifeBook P Series notebook care . 65 specifications . 71 storing . 65 traveling . 65 unpacking . 7 LifeBook P Series notebook specifications additional . 72 agency approval . 72 display specifications . 71 environmental . 72 physical specifications . 71, 72 power . 72 Local Area Network (LAN) . 8 M Memory capacity . 40 compartment . 13, 39 installing . 39 problems . 53 removing . 39 upgrade module . 39 Memory Stick installing . 41 Microphone Jack . 8, 46 microprocessor . 71 modem . 8, 12 Modem (RJ-11) Port . 12, 46 Modem Result Codes . 59 Mouse problems . 52 See Touchpad N Numeric Keypad . 18 NumLk Indicator . 15 O optional accessories . 7 110 P PC Card care . 67 removing . 43 slot . 10 Pen . 11 Port Replicator . 44 attaching . 44 detaching . 44 problems . 52 Port Replicator Connector . 8, 13 Power AC adapter . 29 Auto/Airline adapter . 29 failure . 54 indicator . 14 management . 32 off . 34 power on . 30 problems . 55 sources . 29 Power Management . 32, 33 Power On Self Test . 30, 58 Q Quick Point clicking . 22 control adjustment . 23 double-clicking . 22 dragging . 22 R Registration . 31 Re-Installing Individual Drivers and Applications . 60 Removing a Memory Stick . 41 Restarting the system . 33 Restoring the Factory Image . 60 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software . 60 RJ-11 . 46 RJ-45 . 8, 46 Rotation Hinge . 9 S ScrLk Indicator . 15 SD Card . 11 removing . 41 SDRAM . 13, 39 Secure Digital Card removing . 41 P Series.book Page 111 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM I n d e x Security lock slot . 8 Shut Down . 34 specifications . 71 Standby Mode . 33 status indicators . 9, 14 Suspend Mode . 32 Suspend/Resume Button . 8, 9, 32 T Touch Screen . 23 calibrating . 24 clicking . 23 double-clicking . 23 dragging . 24 Touchpad Pointing Device . 9, 24 Troubleshooting . 51 battery . 54, 55 built-in Speakers . 52 hard drive . 52 memory . 53 mouse/keyboard . 52 port replicator . 52 ports . 53 power . 54 video . 56 U Universal Serial Bus Port . 46 USB . 8, 12, 46 problems . 53 Using the system as a Tablet . 16 V volume control . 25 W Windows keys . 18 Application key . 18 Start key . 18 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN . 86 Using Wireless Zero Configuration Tool . 89 Infrastructure Mode . 86 IP address information . 96 Specifications . 97 Troubleshooting . 93 Wireless LAN Glossary . 94 WLAN On/Off Switch . 8, 11 111 P Series.book Page 112 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM L i f e B o o k P S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - I n d e x 112 P Series.book Page 113 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM P Series.book Page 114 Wednesday, July 13, 2005 10:43 AM
1 2 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 3.69 MiB |
P7010.book Page 1 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Copyright and Trademark Information Cop y ri ght Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. However, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. The absence of a product or service name, slogan, or logo does not constitute a waiver of any trademark or other intellectual property rights relating to that name, slogan, or logo owned by Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation, its parent, subsidiaries, and affiliated companies. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LifeBook are registered trade-
marks of Fujitsu Limited. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks and Centrino is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. IBM, IBM PC AT, and IBM PS/2 are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. MS, MS-DOS, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Memory Stick and Memory Stick Duo are trademarks of Sony, its parent, and/or its affiliates. Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Dolby Headphone manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Quicken is a registered trademark and/or registered service mark of Intuit, Inc. or one of its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of Inter-
video, Inc. Realtek is a registered trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corporation. Norton AntiVirus is a registered trademark of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech-
nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Warning Handling the cord on this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Was h hands after handling. Copyright 2004 Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, translated, stored, or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation. B6FH-4971-01EN-00 D E C L A R A T I O N O F C O N F O R M I T Y according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:
Address:
Telephone:
Declares that product:
Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation 1250 E. Arques Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94085
(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configurations:
LifeBook P1510 notebook LifeBook P1510D notebook Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device must not be allowed to cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. P7010.book Page 2 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k UL Notice For Authorized Repair Technicians Only For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with the same type and rating fuse. Danger of explosion if Lithium (clock) battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dis-
pose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instruction. System Disposal LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT Hg CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL LAWS. This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed Class 2 Adapters with an output rating of 16 VDC, with a current of 3.75A minimum. AC Adapter output polarity:
When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Avoid using the modem during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use the modem to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger UL Listed or CSA Certified Telecommunication Line Cord SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS P7010.book Page 3 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s Fujitsu LifeBook P7000 Notebook Table of Contents 1 PREFACE Preface About This Guide . 1 Fujitsu Contact Information . 1 Warranty . 1 Touchpad Pointing Device Clicking . 15 Double-Clicking . 15 Dragging . 16 Scrolling . 16 Touchpad Control Adjustment . 16 Volume Control Controlling the Volume . 17 Flexible Bay Devices Removing and Installing Modular Devices . 18 3 GETTING STARTED WITH YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK Power Sources Connecting the Power Adapters . 23 Display Panel Opening the Display Panel . 24 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 24 Closing the Display Panel . 24 Starting Your LifeBook Notebook Power On. 25 Boot Sequence . 25 BIOS Setup Utility. 25 Booting the System . 26 Registering Your LifeBook notebook. 26 Installing Click Me!. 26 Power Management Suspend/Resume/Power On Button. 27 Suspend Mode . 27 Hibernation Feature . 27 Display Timeout . 28 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK Overview Unpacking . 5 Locating the Controls/Connectors Top and Front Components . 6 Left-Side Panel Components . 8 Right-Side Panel Components . 9 Rear Panel Components . 10 Bottom Components . 11 Status Indicator Panel Battery Charging Indicators . 12 Battery Level Indicators . 12 Hard Disk/CD Access Indicator. 12 Keyboard Using the Keyboard . 13 Key Indicator Lights . 13 Numeric Keypad. 13 Windows Keys . 13 Cursor Keys . 14 Function Keys. 14 P7010.book Page 4 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k Hard Disk Timeout . 28 Windows Power Management . 28 Restarting the System. 28 Power Off . 28 4 USER-INSTALLABLE FEATURES Lithium ion Battery Recharging the Batteries. 31 Replacing the Battery . 32 External Floppy Disk Drive Loading a Disk . 33 Ejecting a Disk . 33 Preparing a Disk for Use. 33 Optical Drive Media Player Software . 34 Loading a DVD or CD . 34 Removing Media . 35 Using the Optical Drive Software . 35 Using DolbyTM Headphone. 35 Using the Optical Drive on Battery Power . 36 Auto Insert Notification Function . 36 Emergency Tray Release. 36 PC Cards Installing PC Cards . 37 Removing PC Cards . 37 Compact Flash Cards Installing CF Cards . 38 Removing CF Cards . 39 Memory Stick/Secure Digital Slot Installing Memory Stick/SD Cards . 40 Removing A Memory Stick/SD Card . 41 Memory Upgrade Module Accessing the Memory Compartment . 42 Removing a Memory Module. 42 Installing a Memory Module . 42 Checking the Memory Capacity . 43 Device Ports Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Port. 44 Internal LAN (RJ-45) Port. 44 IEEE 1394 Port . 45 S-Video Out Port (TV Out) . 45 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 45 Headphone Jack . 45 Optical Digital Audio Connector . 46 Microphone Jack . 46 External Monitor Port . 46 5 WIRELESS LAN USERS GUIDE Before Using the Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device . 50 Wireless Network Considerations. 51 Deactivating the WLAN Device . 51 Activating the WLAN Device . 52 Configuration of the WLAN Device Flow of Operations . 53 Configuration Using Intel PROSet Software . 53 Configuration Using Atheros Client Utility Software . 54 Connection to the network . 55 Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting. 60 Wireless LAN Glossary Glossary. 61 IP address information About IP Addresses . 63 WLAN Specifications Specification . 63 T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s Dimensions and Weight . 88 Environmental Requirements . 88 Popular Accessories . 88 Pre-Installed Software . 89 Learning About Your Application Software. 89 Regulatory Information . 91 Notice . 91 9 GLOSSARY Glossary . 95 APPENDIX A: USING THE FINGERPRINT SENSOR DEVICE Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Optional Fingerprint Sensor Device . 101 Getting Started. 101 Installing OmniPass . 101 User Enrollment . 102 Using OmniPass . 103 Configuring OmniPass . 105 OmniPass Control Center . 106 Troubleshooting . 107 INDEX Index . 109 P7010.book Page 5 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Identifying the Problem . 67 Specific Problems . 67 Troubleshooting Table . 68 Power On Self Test Messages. 75 Emergency DVD Tray Release . 76 Modem Result Codes . 76 Restoring Pre-installed Software Restoring the Factory Image. 77 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . 78 7 CARING FOR YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK Care and Maintenance Batteries . 82 Floppy Disks and Drives . 82 Media Care . 83 PC Cards . 83 8 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Specifications Configuration Label . 87 Microprocessor. 87 Memory . 87 Video . 87 Audio . 87 Mass Storage Device Options. 87 Features . 87 Device Ports . 88 Keyboard . 88 Power. 88 P7010.book Page 6 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k P7010.book Page 1 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 1 Preface P7010.book Page 2 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k P7010.book Page 1 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Preface ABOUT THIS GUIDE The LifeBook P7000/P7000D Series notebook from Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation is a small but powerful computer. It is powered by an Intel Pentium M processor Ultra-low Voltage (ULV) or an Intel Celeron 852 GML processor, has a built-in wide-aspect Crystal View color display, and brings the functionality of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a portable envi-
ronment. This manual explains how to operate your LifeBook notebooks hardware and built-in system software. It comes with Microsoft Windows XP Home or Window XP Pro pre-installed. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard keys and on-screen buttons appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], and [CTRL]. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. Example: (See page xx.) DOS commands you enter appear in Courier type. Example: Shutdown the computer?
The information icon highlights information that will enhance your understanding of the subject material. The caution icon highlights information that is important to the safe operation of your computer, or to the integrity of your files. Please read all caution information carefully. The warning icon highlights information that can be hazardous to either you, your LifeBook notebook, or your files. Please read all warning information carefully. P r e f a c e FUJITSU CONTACT INFORMATION Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:
Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Fax: (408) 764-2724 E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com Web site:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Online You can go directly to the online Fujitsu Product catalog for your LifeBook notebook by clicking on the Fujitsu Weblinks -> LifeBook Accessories Web site URL link, located in the Windows Start menu. You can also reach Fujitsu Service and Support online by clicking on the Fujitsu Weblinks -> Service and Support Web site URL link, located in the Windows Start menu. You must have an active internet connec-
tion to use the online URL links. WARRANTY Your LifeBook notebook is backed by an International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for warranty terms and conditions. 1 P7010.book Page 2 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n O n e 2 P7010.book Page 3 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 2 Getting to Know Your LifeBook Notebook 3 P7010.book Page 4 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o 4 P7010.book Page 5 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k Overview Figure 2-1 Fujitsu LifeBook P7000 notebook This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LifeBook P7000 notebook. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your notebook even if you are already familiar with notebook computers. UNPACKING When you receive your LifeBook notebook, unpack it carefully, and compare the parts you have received with the items listed below. Figure 2-2 AC Adapter LifeBook P7000/P7000D notebook(Figure 2-1) AC adapter with AC power cord (Figure 2-2) Lithium ion battery Weight Saver Phone/Modem (RJ-11) telephone cable Driver and Application Restore CD Getting Started Guide Users Guide (this document) International Limited Warranty Brochure Certification of Authenticity Depending upon the configuration of your system, one or more of the following items may also be included:
Modular DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive Modular Multi-Format DVD Writer External Floppy Disk Drive Modular 2nd battery Additional main high capacity battery RecordNow CD (included with Combo drive) RecordNow and WinDVD Creator CD (included with Multi-Format DVD Writer) Once you have checked and confirmed that your Life-
Book system is complete, read through the following pages to learn about all of your notebooks components. 5 P7010.book Page 6 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o Display Panel Status Indicator Panel Suspend/Resume/
Power On Button Stereo Speakers Keyboard Num Lock Indicator Caps Lock Indicator Scroll Lock Indicator SD/Memory Stick Slot Microphone Wireless LAN On/Off Switch Figure 2-3 LifeBook notebook with display open Touchpad Pointing Device*
* Touchpad may have scroll button or optional fingerprint sensor device. Locating the Controls and Connectors TOP AND FRONT COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of your LifeBook notebooks top and front components. Wireless LAN On/Off Switch Allows you to turn the optional Wireless LAN device on and off. Note that this switch is present on all models of the LifeBook P7000 notebook, but it is functional only on those with an optional Wireless LAN installed. Built-in Microphone The built-in microphone allows you to input or record mono audio. SD/Memory Stick Slot The Secure Digital (SD)/Memory Stick slot allows you to install a flash memory card for data storage. This archi-
tecture allows you to transfer data between a variety of different digital devices. (See Installing Memory Stick/SD Cards on page 40 for more information) 6 Touchpad Pointing Device/Scroll Button The Touchpad pointing device is a mouse-like cursor control with three buttons (left, right, and scroll*
button). (See Touchpad Pointing Device on page 15 for more information).
* Certain configurations of this system have an optional fingerprint sensor located in place of the scroll button. If you have a system with the optional fingerprint sensor, refer to (See Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 101 for more information) Num Lock/Scroll Lock/Caps Lock Indicator These indicators light up when the num lock, scroll lock, or caps lock buttons have been turned on. (See Using the Keyboard on page 13 for more information). Keyboard A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. (See Keyboard on page 13 for more information) Stereo Speakers The built-in dual box speakers allow for stereo sound. G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k P7010.book Page 7 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Suspend/Resume/Power On Button The Suspend/Resume/Power On button allows you to suspend notebook activity without powering off, resume your LifeBook notebook from suspend mode, and power on your notebook when it has been shut down from Windows. (See Suspend/Resume/Power On Button on page 27 for more information) Status Indicator Panel The Status Indicator Panel displays symbols that corre-
spond with a specific component of your LifeBook note-
book. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Display Panel The display panel is a color LCD panel with back lighting for the display of text and graphics. 7 P7010.book Page 8 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o PC Card Slot PC Card Eject Button Compact Flash Slot Compact Flash Card Eject Button Flexible Bay Modem Port DC Power Jack Figure 2-4 LifeBook notebook left-side panel The internal modem is not intended for use with Digital PBX systems. Do not connect the internal modem to a Digital PBX as it may cause serious damage to the internal modem or your entire notebook. Consult your PBX manufacturers documentation for details. Some hotels have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find out BEFORE you connect your modem. The internal multinational modem is designed to the ITU-T V.90 standard. Its maximum speed of 53000bps is the highest allowed by FCC, and its actual connection rate depends on the line conditions. The maximum speed is 33600bps at upload. For additional information about the multinational modem, refer to the Fujitsu web site at: us.fujitsu.com/computers. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter or the optional Auto/Airline adapter to power your note-
book and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. LEFT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of your LifeBook notebooks left-side components. PC Card Slot The PC Card Slot allows you to install one Type II PC Card. (See PC Cards on page 37 for more information) PC Card Eject Button The PC Card eject button allows you to remove PC Cards from the PC Card slot. (See PC Cards on page 37 for more information) Compact Flash Card Slot Allows you to insert a compact flash (CF) card. (See Compact Flash Cards on page 38 for more information) Compact Flash Card Eject Button Allows you to eject a compact flash card. (See Removing CF Cards on page 39 for more information) Flexible Bay The Flexible Bay can accommodate either the standard DVD/CD-RW Drive or an optional modular bay battery. If neither device is installed, the weight saver should be installed. (See Flexible Bay Devices on page 18 for more information) Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Port The Modem (RJ-11) telephone port is for attaching a telephone line to the internal multinational 56K modem. (See Modem (RJ-11) Telephone Port on page 44 for more information) 8 P7010.book Page 9 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k LAN (RJ-45) Port IEEE 1394 Port S-Video Out Port External Monitor Port Port Access Doors
(open) USB Ports Microphone Jack Headphone/Optical Digital Audio Out Jack Figure 2-5 LifeBook notebook right-side panel Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external mono microphone. (See Microphone Jack on page 46 for more information) Headphone/Optical Digital Audio Jack The headphone/optical digital audio jack allows you to connect headphones or to download digital audio onto a MiniDisc recorders SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Inter-
face) format. (See Optical Digital Audio Connector on page 46 for more information) RIGHT-SIDE PANEL COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of your LifeBook notebooks right-side components. LAN (RJ-45) Port The internal LAN (RJ-45) port is used for an internal Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX) connection.
(See Internal LAN (RJ-45) Port on page 44 for more infor-
mation) IEEE 1394 Port The IEEE 1394 port (also known as Firewire) is used to connect between your LifeBook and a peripheral such as a digital video camera.(See IEEE 1394 Port on page 45 for more information) S-Video Out Port The S-video out port is used to transmit a higher resolu-
tion video signal to a compatible TV or VCR.
(See S-Video Out Port (TV Out) on page 45 for more information) External Monitor Port The external monitor port allows you to connect your LifeBook notebook to an external monitor. (See External Monitor Port on page 46 for more information) Port Access Doors The port access doors are designed to protect the ports when they are not in use. USB 2.0 Ports The USB ports allow you to connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 devices. (See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 45 for more information) 9 P7010.book Page 10 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o Air Vents Anti-theft Lock Slot Figure 2-6 LifeBook notebook rear panel REAR PANEL COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of your LifeBook notebooks rear components. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. Air Vents The air vents allow for proper cooling of the system while it is operating. 10 P7010.book Page 11 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k Main Lithium ion Battery Battery Release Latches Memory Module Cover Main Unit and Configuration Label
(approximate location) Flexible Bay Release Latch Air Vents Figure 2-7 LifeBook notebook bottom panel BOTTOM COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of your LifeBook notebooks bottom panel components. Lithium ion Battery The internal Lithium ion battery can be installed in the battery bay by aligning it with the slides and pushing it into place. The battery can be removed when swapping with a charged battery, or when the computer is to be stored for a long period of time. (See Lithium ion Battery on page 31 for more information) Battery Release Latches Slide the battery releases to unlatch the battery. Memory Module Cover Removable cover over the memory modules. (See Removing a Memory Module on page 42 for more infor-
mation) Flexible Bay Release Latch The Flexible Bay Release Latch releases the flexible bay device for removal. (See Removing and Installing Modular Devices on page 18 for more information) Main Unit and Configuration Label The configuration label shows the model number and other information about your LifeBook notebook. In addition, the configuration portion of the label has the serial number and manufacturer information that you will need to give your support representative. It identi-
fies the exact version of various components of your notebook. Air Vents The air vents allow for proper cooling of the system while it is operating. 11 P7010.book Page 12 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o Battery 1 Charging Indicator Battery 2 Charging Indicator Hard Drive/
Optical Drive Access Battery 1 Level Indicator Battery 2 Level Indicator Figure 2-8 Status Indicator Panel If the battery pack is installed while the power is turned off, the battery level indicator will display the charge level for five seconds after it blinks orange. If the AC adapter is not connected or the battery pack is not fully charged when the computer is switched to standby mode, the indicator will blink. The LED blinks at the rate of one second on/five seconds off. Batteries subjected to shocks, vibration or extreme temperatures can be perma-
nently damaged. A shorted battery is damaged and must be replaced. HARD DISK/CD ACCESS INDICATOR The Hard Disk/CD access indicator lights when the hard disk or optical drive is being accessed. To prevent corruption of data, do not press the power button when the hard disk/CD access indicator is lit. Status Indicator Panel The Status Indicator displays symbols that correspond with a specific component of your LifeBook notebook. These symbols (when visible) tell you how each of those components is operating. (Figure 2-8). When you turn off the system, all indicators will go off, except when the battery is being charged. BATTERY CHARGING INDICATORS When the AC adapter is connected to your system, these indicators show the status of the specified battery charging (either the primary battery 1 or modular battery 2), as follows:
Green, solid: The battery is either fully charged or the AC adapter is connected and there is no battery pack installed. Orange, solid: The battery pack is charging. Orange, blinking: Charging is suspended due to exces-
sively high or low battery temperature. Off: No AC adapter is connected. BATTERY LEVEL INDICATORS The Battery Level indicators display the charge level of the indicated battery pack, as follows:
Green, solid: Battery is between 51% and 100%
charged. Orange, solid: Battery is between 13% and 50%
charged. Red, solid: Battery is between 0% and 12% charged. Orange, blinking: Blinks during battery status measurement (Four seconds after the battery is installed). Red, blinking: There is a problem with the battery. Off: There is no battery installed. 12 P7010.book Page 13 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k Function Keys Fn Key Windows Start Key Numeric Keypad Figure 2-9 Keyboard Windows Application Key Cursor Keys Keyboard USING THE KEYBOARD Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has an integral 82-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys. (Figure 2-9) Numeric keypad: Your notebook allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to tog-
gle between the standard character and numerical keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key. Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running. Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system and function the same as the onscreen Start menu button, or the right button on your pointing device. KEY INDICATOR LIGHTS There are three small indicator lights located on the lower right of the palm rest. (Figure 2-10). When lit, these lights indicate that the related key is locked. Num Lock Indicator Caps Lock Indicator Scroll Lock Indicator Figure 2-10 Key Indicators NUMERIC KEYPAD Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary functions.
(Figure 2-9) WINDOWS KEYS Your LifeBook notebook has two Windows keys, consisting of a Start key and an Application key. The Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The 13 P7010.book Page 14 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o Application key functions the same as your right mouse button and displays shortcut menus for the selected item. (Please refer to your Windows documentation for additional information regarding the Windows keys.)
(Figure 2-9) CURSOR KEYS The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and right in applications. In programs such as Windows Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). (Figure 2-9) FUNCTION KEYS Your LifeBook notebook has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. The functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software documentation to find out how these keys are used.
(Figure 2-9) The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the notebook and is always used in conjunction with another key.
[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.
[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the
[Fn+F4] combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See Entering the BIOS Setup Utility on page 25)
[Fn+F5]: Pressing [F5] while holding [Fn] allows you to toggle between video compensation and no compensation. (Video compensation controls spacing on the display. When it is enabled, displays with 1024 x 768 or 800 x 600 pixel resolution will still cover the entire screen.) Note that this function is only applicable if Compensation is disabled in the BIOS.
(See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more informa-
tion).
[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will lower the brightness of your display.*
[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will increase the brightness of the display.*
[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will decrease the volume of your LifeBook note-
book.**
[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn]
will increase the volume of your LifeBook notebook.**
[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order, are: built-in display panel only, both built-in display panel and external monitor or external monitor only.
* There are eight brightness levels.
** There are 26 audio levels. 14 P7010.book Page 15 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k Cursor Cursor Control Left Button Scroll Button
(or optional fingerprint sensor) Right Button Figure 2-11 Touchpad pointing device Touchpad Pointing Device The Touchpad pointing device comes built into your LifeBook notebook. It is used to control the movement of the pointer to select items on your display panel. The Touchpad is composed of a cursor control, a left and right button, and a scrolling button. The cursor control works the same way a mouse does, and moves the cursor around the display. It only requires light pressure with the tip of your finger. The left and right buttons function the same as mouse buttons. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. The scrolling button allows you to navi-
gate quickly through pages, without having to use the scroll bars. (Figure 2-15) Certain configurations of the LifeBook P7000 notebook have an optional finger-
print sensor instead of a scrolling button. For information on using the optional fin-
gerprint sensor, refer to Fingerprint Sen-
sor Device on page 101. CLICKING Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-
click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you wish to select, press the right button once, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the Touchpad once. (Figure 2-12) Figure 2-12 Clicking DOUBLE-CLICKING Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button twice, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the double-click operation by tapping lightly on the Touchpad twice.
(Figure 2-13) Figure 2-13 Double-clicking 15 Figure 2-15 Scrolling with scrolling button Figure 2-16 Scrolling with Touchpad TOUCHPAD CONTROL ADJUSTMENT If you need to change or adjust any of the touchpad control functions, you can customize them from the Mouse properties dialog box in the Control Panel. Click on Start, select Settings > Control Panel, then double-
click Mouse. P7010.book Page 16 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o If the interval between clicks is too long, the double-click will not be executed. Parameters for the Touchpad can be adjusted from the Mouse Properties dialog box located in the Windows Control Panel. DRAGGING Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its new location by moving your finger across the Touchpad, and then release your finger. (Figure 2-14) Figure 2-14 Dragging SCROLLING Using the Scrolling button allows you to navigate through a document quickly without using the windows scroll bars. This is particularly useful when you are navigating through on-line pages. To use the Scrolling button, press the crescent shape at the top or bottom of the button to scroll up or down a page. When you have reached the desired section of the page, release the button. (Figure 2-15) If you have an optional fingerprint sensor in the location of the Scrolling button, you can scroll by sliding your finger up and down the fingerprint sensor.(Figure 2-16). Note that you can also scroll by sliding your finger up and down the right side of the touchpad. This feature is disabled by default, but you can enable it by going to Start -> Control Panel -> Mouse. 16 P7010.book Page 17 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k Volume Control Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has multiple volume controls which interact with each other.
[Fn] will decrease the volume of your notebook. Press-
ing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your notebook. Any software that contains audio files will also contain a volume control of its own. If you install an external audio device that has an independent volume control, the hardware volume control and the software volume control will interact with each other. It should be noted that if you set your software volume to Off, you will override external volume control settings. CONTROLLING THE VOLUME The volume can be controlled in several different ways:
Volume can be set from within the Volume Control on the Taskbar. Volume can be controlled with the [F8] and [F9]
functions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding There are 26 levels through which the function keys cycle. Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications. Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 17 P7010.book Page 18 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o Flexible Bay Figure 2-17 Flexible Bay Flexible Bay Devices Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook contains a Flexible Bay. The Flexible Bay can accommodate a modular Multi-
Format DVD Writer, a modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive, a modular Lithium ion battery, or a weight saver.
(Figure 2-17) Modular Multi-Format DVD Writer: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs and record to DVD+RW, CD-R/RW, and DVD-RAM discs. Modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs as well as to write to CDs. Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable battery that can be used to power your LifeBook note-
book when an adapter is not connected. 3. Turn the system over and slide the release latch
(Figure 2-18). Pull out the Flexible Bay device from the slot. Flexible Bay Release Latch Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no Figure 2-18 Removing a device from the Flexible Bay device is installed. REMOVING AND INSTALLING MODULAR DEVICES To remove and install modular devices in the Flexible Bay, you can perform either a cold-swapping or hot-
swapping of the device. Cold-swapping means swapping devices while your LifeBook notebook is powered off. Hot-swapping occurs when your system is powered on with a charged main battery or AC Adapter. You should never leave your Flexible Bay empty when the notebook is in operation. If left empty, dust or foreign matter may accumulate inside the notebook. Cold-swapping To cold-swap modular devices in your Flexible Bay follow these easy steps:
1. Close any open files. 2. Shut down your LifeBook notebook. 18 Be careful when aligning and seating devices in the bay. If the fit is incorrect, you may damage the bay or the device. If the device does not move easily in the bay, remove it, and check for dirt or foreign objects. It will require a firm push to latch the device in place. Figure 2-19 Installing a device in the Flexible Bay G e t t i n g t o K n o w Y o u r L i f e B o o k P7010.book Page 19 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 5. Slide the device you are installing into your note-
book until it clicks into place. (Figure 2-19) 6. It is now safe to turn your notebook back on. 7. You can now access and use the device. Your LifeBook notebook will automatically detect the new device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer. Hot-swapping To hot-swap Flexible Bay devices while the system is powered on, follow these steps:
1. Prior to performing the hot-swap, make sure you have a charged main battery installed, or an AC Adapter is powering the system. If your system is in Suspend mode, press the Suspend/Resume button to resume operation. 2. 3. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the lower right-hand corner of the screen. 4. From the list that appears, click the device you want to remove. 5. Pull out the Flexible Bay eject lever. This will push your device out slightly, allowing you to remove the device. 6. Slide your device out until it is clear of the bay. This will require light force. Be careful when aligning and seating devices in the bay. If the fit is incorrect, you may damage the bay or the device. If the device does not move easily in the bay, remove it, and check for dirt or foreign objects. It will require a firm push to latch the device in place. 7. Slide the device you are installing into your notebook until it clicks into place. 8. You can now access and use the device. Your LifeBook notebook will automatically detect the new device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer. 19 P7010.book Page 20 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T w o 20 P7010.book Page 21 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 3 Getting Started 21 P7010.book Page 22 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T h r e e 22 P7010.book Page 23 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM G e t t i n g S t a r t e d DC Power Jack AC Adapter AC Cable DC Output Cable Figure 3-1 Connecting the AC Adapter Power Sources Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has four possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, an optional modular Lithium ion battery, an AC adapter, or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. CONNECTING THE POWER ADAPTERS The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your notebook and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your LifeBook notebook. 2. Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet.
(Figure 3-1) Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1. Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your notebook. 2. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile with the ignition key in the On or Accessories position. OR 3. Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1. Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2. Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. The Lithium ion battery is not charged upon purchase. Initially, you will need to connect either the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter to use your notebook. 23 P7010.book Page 24 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T h r e e Figure 3-2 Opening the Display Panel Display Panel Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook contains a display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments and maintains top resolution through the use of active-
matrix technology. OPENING THE DISPLAY PANEL Lift the display backwards, being careful not to touch the screen, until it is at a comfortable viewing angle.
(Figure 3-2) ADJUSTING DISPLAY PANEL BRIGHTNESS Once you have turned on your LifeBook notebook, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are two ways to adjust the brightness, by using the keyboard or the power management utility. Using the Keyboard Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the setting only temporarily.
[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.
[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. CLOSING THE DISPLAY PANEL Holding the edge of your display panel, pull it forward until it is flush with the body of your LifeBook notebook. 24 P7010.book Page 25 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Starting Your LifeBook Notebook POWER ON Suspend/Resume/Power On button The Suspend/Resume/Power On button is used to turn on your LifeBook notebook from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion Battery, you can power on your notebook. When you turn on your LifeBook note-
book be sure you have a battery installed and charged, or that the AC or Auto/Air-
line adapter is connected and has power. Status Indicator Panel Suspend/Resume/
Power On Button Figure 3-3 Pressing the suspend/resume/power button Press the Suspend/Resume/Power On button that is adjacent to the status indicator panel (Figure 3-3). When you are done working you can either leave your LifeBook notebook in Suspend mode, (See Suspend Mode on page 27 for more information), or you can turn it off. (See Power Off on page 28 for more information) Do not carry your LifeBook notebook around with the power on or subject it to shocks or vibration, as you risk damaging your notebook. When turn on your LifeBook notebook, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your LifeBook notebook will emit an audio warning and/
or an error message will be displayed. (See Power On Self Test Messages on page 75 for more information) Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the Power On Self Test
(POST), your notebook will load your operating system. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Never turn off your LifeBook notebook during the Power On Self Test (POST) or it will cause an error message to be displayed the next time you turn on your LifeBook notebook. (See Power On Self Test Mes-
sages on page 75 for more information) BOOT SEQUENCE The procedure for starting-up your notebook is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your notebooks BIOS. When your LifeBook notebook is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your notebook. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your notebook, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system is loaded. During booting, your notebook is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test
(POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:
You turn on the power to your LifeBook notebook. You restart your notebook from the Windows Shut Down dialog box. The software initiates a system restart. Example:
When you install a new application. You reset the system by pressing the three keys
[CTRL+ALT+DEL]. BIOS SETUP UTILITY The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the operating environment for your LifeBook notebook. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your notebook. The BIOS Setup Utility configures:
Device control feature parameters, such as changing I/O addresses and boot devices. System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:
1. Turn on or restart your LifeBook notebook. 2. Press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. 25 P7010.book Page 26 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T h r e e 3. Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your notebooks BIOS is available online. Please visit our service and support Web site at http://
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Once there, select Support, then select Notebooks under Users Guides. Select LifeBook BIOS Guides from the pull-
down menu for your LifeBook series. If you are unsure of your notebooks BIOS number, refer to your packing slip. BOOTING THE SYSTEM We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices and do not put a DVD/CD in your drive until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your LifeBook notebook for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Designed to accommodate the needs of many users, in many different countries, Windows needs to be config-
ured the first time you use them. Windows has three parts:
Getting Started: You have the opportunity to enter custom information for your configuration file and setup your modem so that your LifeBook notebook will be prepared to dial out. Registration: Easy online registration for Windows with Microsoft, and for your LifeBook notebook with Fujitsu. Windows License Agreement and Final Settings:
You have the opportunity to review the Windows License Agreement. You may click Cancel at any time within this process to shut down Windows. You may restart this process at any time in the future, but you must complete it in order to use your computer. Getting Started Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in the information as directed. You will be asked for such items as the language you wish to use, the country in which you live, your first and last name, and about how you dial out from where you will be using your LifeBook notebook. For the modem settings, enter your current location information where you will be using your Life-
Book notebook. If you are not connected to a phone line and plan to register at a later time, you may click the Skip button, and you will go directly to the condition of use page. 26 Once you have set up your LifeBook notebook to dial out, Windows will make a free telephone call to test the settings. If the call is unsuccessful, you will be returned to the phone settings page where you may try to fix them. If you are unable to fix the settings please contact Fujitsu Service and Support. (See Fujitsu Contact Infor-
mation on page 1 for more information). If you would simply like to move on, and register at a later time, you may click the Skip button, and you will go directly to the Condition of Use page. Windows Registration If your connection is successful, you will go to a Registration Confirmation page. Enter the requested information, then check the box at the bottom to register your copy of Windows with Microsoft. Once you have finished, click the Next button to continue. Final Settings The first part of your final settings is the Windows End User License Agreement. Read the agreement carefully. When you finish reading you must accept or reject the terms of the agreement and then click on the Next button. If you reject the terms of the license agreement you will be asked to review the license agreement for information on returning Windows or to shut down your LifeBook notebook. You cannot use your LifeBook notebook until you have accepted the License Agreement. If you stop the process your notebook will return to the beginning of the Windows Welcome Process, even if you shut your notebook down and start it up again. REGISTERING YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK How do I register my LifeBook notebook?
You can register your LifeBook by going to our Web site:
us.fujitsu.com/computers You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to use the last option. INSTALLING CLICK ME!
The first time you boot up your system, you will see an icon called Click Me! in the Start folder or in the system tray in the bottom right of the screen. When you click the Click Me! icon, your system will automatically build the icon tray in the bottom right of the screen. These icons provide links to utilities that you will frequently access. P7010.book Page 27 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Power Management Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention, such as those for the internal modem. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your oper-
ating conditions, such as those for the display bright-
ness. Internal power management for your notebook may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your notebook into Suspend mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. SUSPEND/RESUME/POWER ON BUTTON When your LifeBook notebook is active, the Suspend/
Resume/Power On button can be used to manually put your notebook into Suspend mode. Push the button when your notebook is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. You will hear two short beeps and your system will enter Suspend mode. (See figure 2-3 on page 6 for location) If your LifeBook notebook is suspended, pushing the Suspend/Resume/Power On button will return your notebook to active operation. You can tell whether or not your system is in Suspend mode by looking at the Power indicator. (See figure 2-3 on page 6) If the indi-
cator is visible and not flashing, your notebook is fully operational. If the indicator is both visible and flashing, your notebook is in Suspend mode. If the indicator is not visible at all, the power is off or your notebook is in Hibernation mode. SUSPEND MODE Suspend or Standby mode in Windows saves the contents of your LifeBook notebooks system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode will turn off the CPU, the display, the hard drive, and all of the other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and allow for restarting. Your notebook can be put in Suspend mode by:
Pressing the Suspend/Resume/Power On button when your system is turned on. Selecting Standby from the Windows Shut Down menu. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. You can change the actions the computer takes when the lid is closed or buttons are pressed by clicking [Start] ->
Control Panel. Double-click the Power Options icon and select the Advanced tab. Your LifeBook notebooks system memory typically stores the file(s) on which you are working, open applica-
tion(s) information, and any other data required to support the operation(s) in progress. When you resume operation from Suspend mode, your notebook will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Suspend/Resume/Power On button to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your notebook will not resume. If you are running your LifeBook note-
book on battery power, be aware that the battery continues to discharge while your notebook is in Suspend mode, though not as fast as when fully opera-
tional. Disabling the Suspend/Resume/Power On button prevents it from being used to put your LifeBook notebook in Suspend or Hibernation mode. The resume function of the button cannot be disabled. If your LifeBook notebook is actively accessing information when you enter the Suspend or Hibernation mode, changes to open files are not lost. The files are left open and memory is kept active during Suspend mode or the memory is transferred to the internal hard drive during Hibernation mode. The Suspend or Hibernation mode should not be used with certain PC Cards. Check your PC Card documentation for more information. When PC Cards or external devices are in use, Hibernation mode cannot return to the exact state prior to suspension, because all of the peripheral devices will be re-initialized when the system restarts. HIBERNATION FEATURE The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your LifeBook notebooks system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or disable this feature. 27 P7010.book Page 28 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n T h r e e Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature The default settings is not enabled. To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these easy steps:
RESTARTING THE SYSTEM If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel. 2. From the Control Panel select Power Options. 3. Select the Hibernation tab. Select the box to enable or disable this feature. 1. Click the Start button, and then click Shut Down. 2. Select the Restart option from within the Windows Shut Down dialog box. 3. Click OK to restart your notebook. Your notebook will shut down and then reboot. Turning off your LifeBook notebook with-
out exiting Windows or turning on your notebook within 10 seconds of the note-
book being shut off may cause an error when you start the next time. POWER OFF Before turning off the power, check that the Hard Drive, DVD, CD-ROM, CD-RW, PC Card and the Floppy Disk Drive Access indicators are all Off. (See figure 2-3 on page 6) If you turn off the power while accessing a disk or PC Card there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your notebook shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. Be sure to close all files, exit all applica-
tions, and shut down your operating sys-
tem prior to turning off the power. If files are open when you turn the power off, you will lose any changes that have not been saved, and may cause disk errors. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your notebook to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:
1. Click the Start button, and then click Shut Down. 2. Select the Shut Down option from within the Windows Shut Down dialog box. 3. Click OK to shut down your notebook. If you are going to store your notebook for a month or more see Care and Maintenance Section. Using the Hibernation Feature 1. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel. 2. From the Control Panel select Power Options. 3. Select the Advanced tab. Select Hibernate from the pull down menu for Power buttons. You can also enter Hibernate mode by clicking Start -> Shut Down..., then select-
ing Hibernate from the dropdown menu. DISPLAY TIMEOUT The Video Timeout is one of the power management parameters. This feature saves power by turning off the display if there is no keyboard or pointer activity for the user selected timeout period. Any keyboard or pointer activity will cause the display to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button and can be enabled and disabled in Windows and BIOS setup utility. HARD DISK TIMEOUT The Hard Disk Timeout is another one of the power management parameters. This feature saves power by turning off the hard drive if there is no hard drive activity for the user selected timeout period. Any attempt to access the hard drive will cause it to restart automatically. This feature is independent of the Suspend/Resume button and can be enabled and disabled in Windows and BIOS setup utility. WINDOWS POWER MANAGEMENT Power Management The Power Management icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Management to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the notebook on battery power or one of the adapters. The settings may also be changed in the BIOS. 28 P7010.book Page 29 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 4 User-Installable Features 29 P7010.book Page 30 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r 30 P7010.book Page 31 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Lithium ion Battery Your LifeBook notebook has a Lithium ion battery (and possibly an optional modular battery) that provides power for operating your notebook when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals, or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:
When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C
(41F) or a high of 35C (95F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The charging indicator on the Status Indicator panel will flash red for the affected battery (battery 1 or 2) when you try to charge a battery that is outside of operating temperature range.
(See Battery Charging Indicators on page 12 for more information) When using a high current device such as a modem, DVD/CD-RW drive, or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. Do not leave a faulty battery in your LifeBook notebook. It may damage your AC adapter, optional Auto/Airline adapter, another battery or your notebook itself. It may also prevent operation of your notebook by draining all available current into the bad battery. Battery life will vary based on screen brightness, applications, features, power management settings, battery condition and other customer preferences.DVD, CD-RW, CD-ROM, or hard drive usage may also have a significant impact on battery life. The battery charging capac-
ity is reduced as the battery ages. If your battery is running low quickly, you should replace it with a new one. Under federal, state, or local law it may be illegal to dispose of batteries by put-
ting them in the trash. Take care of our environment by disposing of batteries properly. Check with your local govern-
ment authority for information on recy-
cling or disposing of old batteries. If you cannot find this information elsewhere, contact your support representative at 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s RECHARGING THE BATTERIES If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level 1 indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. If you want to know the condition of the secondary modular Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level 2 indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your LifeBook notebook and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. Make sure that the Battery Charging indica-
tor and the percentage charge is shown inside the Battery Level icon on the Status Indicator Panel. (See Battery Charging Indicators on page 12 for more informa-
tion) There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your notebook is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your notebook into Suspend mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 27 for more information) Using heavy current devices such as Modem or frequent DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM accesses may prevent charging completely. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notifica-
tion message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your notebook will go into Suspend mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the notebook reaches this point. 31 P7010.book Page 32 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Once the low battery notification mes-
sage appears, you need to save all your active data and put your system into Suspend mode until you can provide a new power source. You should provide a charged battery, AC power adapter, or Auto/Airline adapter as soon as possible. When you are in Suspend mode there must always be at least one power source active. If you turn off the power or remove all power sources while your LifeBook notebook is in Suspend mode, any data that has not been saved to the hard drive will be lost. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indi-
cator just like the normal Suspend mode. Once your notebook goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Suspend/Resume button to resume operation. In Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be main-
tained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the charging indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your notebook while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel battery charging icons will blink red to indicate a shorted battery or battery problem. This indicates that the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage any other parts of your LifeBook notebook. REPLACING THE BATTERY With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. Swapping Batteries when Additional Power Source is not Available To swap batteries in your battery bay when you dont have another power source available (such as an AC Adapter or charged modular battery), follow these easy steps: (Figure 4-1) 1. Have a charged battery ready to install. 2. Shut down your notebook. 3. Press and hold the battery release latches to open the bay. (Figure 4-1) 32 Battery Release Latches Figure 4-1 Removing the Battery 4. Remove the battery from the bay. 5. Place the new battery into the bay. (Figure 4-2) 6. Verify that the battery bay latches click into place. Figure 4-2 Installing a battery Swapping Batteries when another Power Source is available To swap batteries in your battery bay when you have an additional power source (such as an AC Adapter or charged modular battery), follow these easy steps:
(Figure 4-1) 1. Plug in an AC Adapter or install a fully charged modular battery in the Flexible Bay to ensure power is supplied to the system. 2. Slide and hold the battery release latches to open the bay. 3. Remove the battery from the bay. 4. Slide the new battery into the bay. 5. Verify that the battery bay latches click into place. If the Lithium ion battery connector is not fully seated, you may not be able to use your notebook or charge your battery. P7010.book Page 33 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s Eject Button Figure 4-3 Loading/Ejecting a 3.5 Floppy Disk External Floppy Disk Drive Your LifeBook notebook may have an optional external floppy disk drive which can read and write information on removable 1.44MB and 720KB floppy disks. Your LifeBook notebook is preconfigured to boot from a floppy drive. Reference the BIOS manual for further information on changing the default boot drive. LOADING A DISK To load a disk into your disk drive, follow these easy steps:
1. Orient the disk so that its label is facing upwards and the shutter side is pointing towards the drive.
(Figure 4-3) 2. Push the disk into the drive until the Eject button pops out and you hear a click. EJECTING A DISK To eject a disk from the disk drive, follow these easy steps:
1. Check that the Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator is inactive. 2. Press the Eject button. This will push your disk partially out of the drive. 3. Remove the disk. If you eject the disk while the Floppy Disk Drive Access indicator is active, there is a risk of damaging the data on the disk, the disk itself or even the disk drive. PREPARING A DISK FOR USE Before you can use a new disk, it needs to be prepared so your LifeBook notebook knows where to store informa-
tion. This preparation is called formatting or initializing a disk. You will need to format new disks, unless they are preformatted. (Please refer to your operating system manual for step-by-step instructions on formatting a disk) To prevent accidental erasure of the data stored on a disk, slide the write protect tab until a small hole is exposed. This sets the disk into a protected state where nothing can be added or removed. If you want to add or remove data on a protected disk, slide the write protect tab to close the small hole. (Figure 4-4) Write Enabled Write Protected Figure 4-4 Floppy Disk Write Protect Formatting a floppy disk that already con-
tains data will erase all of the information on the disk. 33 P7010.book Page 34 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Media Holder Tray Media Eject Button Figure 4-5 Optical Disk Drive Optical Drive There is a variety of media available to use with your system, depending upon the system configuration you have selected. Multi-Format DVD Writer and DVD/CD-
RW Combo drives are collectively known as optical drives. A CD-R or DVD-R disc can only be written to once;
CD-RW or DVD-RW discs can be written to over and over. CD-R and CD-RW discs hold up to 700MB of data. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs hold up to 4.7 GB of data. Depending upon the configuration of your LifeBook notebook, you may have one of the following drives:
Multi-Format DVD Writer: The Multi-Format DVD Writer combines seven recordable formats in a single drive (DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-
RAM, CD-R, and CD-RW), making it the most versa-
tile drive to date. DVD/CD-RW combo: A DVD/CD-RW combo drive allows you to access movie, software, data, or audio DVD/CDs, and to write data onto recordable CD-R and CD-RW discs. Install your media player software before first using the optical drive. Refer to the applicable readme file on the Driver Applications CD-ROM. MEDIA PLAYER SOFTWARE Multi-Format DVD Writer model only: With the Multi-
Format DVD Writer and media player software you can play DVD movies and music CDs on your LifeBook notebook. The media player includes controls which allow you to take full advantage of the features of a DVD movie, as well as standard features such as fast forward, fast reverse, pause, etc. With this drive you can also burn onto recordable DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, or CD-R/
RW discs. 34 The Multi-Format DVD Writer also supports burning and reading of DVD-
RAM. (Windows XP supports burning and reading of DVD-RAM as a standard feature.) DVD/CD-RW Combo model only: With the combo drive, you can play DVD movies, read audio CDs, and write data onto recordable CD-R or CD-RW discs. LOADING A DVD OR CD To load a disc into your optical drive, follow these steps
(Figure 4-6):
1. Push and release the eject button on the front of the optical drive to open the holder tray. The tray will come out of the notebook a short distance. 2. Gently pull the tray out until a media disc can easily be placed in the tray. There may be a protective sheet in the tray from when it was shipped; make sure it is removed before operating the drive, other-
wise you may damage the drive. 3. Place the media disc into the tray, label side up. Snap the hole in the center of the disc onto the raised circle in the center of the tray. 4. Gently push the holder tray back in until you hear a click. If you have disabled the Auto Insert Notifi-
cation Function, you will have to start the drive from your desktop, since your note-
book will not automatically recognize that media has been loaded. P7010.book Page 35 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM
(a)
(c)
(b)
(d) Figure 4-6 Loading/Removing Media REMOVING MEDIA 1. Push and release the eject button on the front of the optical drive. This will stop the drive and the holder tray will come out of the notebook a short distance. 2. Gently pull the tray out until the disc can easily be removed from the tray. 3. Carefully remove the media disc from the holder tray. 4. Gently push the holder tray back in until you hear a click. USING THE OPTICAL DRIVE SOFTWARE Starting a DVD Movie 1. Insert the DVD movie into the optical drive of your notebook. If the CD AutoRun feature activates, skip Step 2. 2. The first time you insert a movie into the media tray, you will be prompted to select what you want the system to do when discs are inserted (i.e., start auto-
matically or wait for a prompt). Until you make a selection, you will receive the same prompt when-
ever you insert a disc. Opening the Optical Drive Control Panel With most DVD-ROMs, you have the option of altering how the movie should play and what you wish to view. You can do this by using the optical drive control panel and the mouse. 1. Right-click on the movie screen to open a dropdown menu for options. 2. Select View, then Player for all the controls available. This will open the control panel into the bottom of the screen. Using the Optical Drive Control Panel The optical drive software allows you to watch the movie much like a VCR player. You have the option to pause, rewind, fast-forward and stop the movie at any point. 1. To Pause the movie, click the button. U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s 2. To Rewind the movie, click the button to rewind to a specific portion of the movie, or the button to return to the opening screen. 3. To Fast-forward the movie, click the button to forward to a specific portion of the movie, or the button to jump to the ending credits. 4. To Stop the movie, click the button. Exiting the DVD/CD-RW Application 1. Click the located in the upper right corner of the title bar. This will open an optical drive dialog box. 2. Click Yes to stop and exit the movie, or No to close the optical drive dialog box and return to the movie. USING DOLBYTM HEADPHONE The Dolby Headphone utility lets you enjoy multi-
channel sound sources, such as movies, with realistic surround sound using your conventional stereo head-
phones. Dolby Headphone is a signal processing system that enables your stereo headphones to realistically portray the sound of a five-speaker playback system. Media discs which do not have the Dolby Surround 5:1 symbol will not support Dolby Headphone. After making changes to the Dolby Headphone feature and clicking OK, wait at least ten seconds before making another change in order to allow the system to stabilize. To use the Dolby Headphone feature, perform the following steps:
1. Double click the InterVideo WinDVD icon on your desktop. On the toolbar that appears, click the Fujitsu logo 2. 3. Select the desired Room Filter Setting. 4. Click OK. The Dolby Headphone feature will now be enabled until you disable it selecting Disable in the Dolby Headphones menu (click on the Fujitsu logo to open it). Note that Dolby Headphone is not accessible if a DVD is not inserted. 35 Some shorter DVD movies may not require you to swap batteries or attach AC power to complete them. However, it is best to be prepared since actual battery life while operating the optical drive cannot be guaranteed. AUTO INSERT NOTIFICATION FUNCTION The Auto Insert Notification function allows your Life-
Book notebook to automatically start a DVD/CD as soon as it is inserted in the optical drive and the tray is closed. Your notebook will begin playing an audio DVD/CD or will start an application if the DVD/CD includes an auto run file. To prevent a CD from playing automatically as soon as it is inserted, refer to the related help file for your specific operating system. EMERGENCY TRAY RELEASE In the event that your system does not have power applied, you can still open the media tray using the end of an opened paper clip. To open the tray, insert the paper clip into the emergency tray release hole on the fact of the tray (Figure 4-7). The tray will pop open. Figure 4-7 Using the Emergency Tray Release P7010.book Page 36 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r USING THE OPTICAL DRIVE ON BATTERY POWER Since an optical drive consumes a lot of power, your overall battery life will be shorter when operating the drive continuously (such as watching a DVD movie) than during standard operation. Many movies run-times are longer than your LifeBook notebook can support on a single battery. If you are watching a DVD movie on battery power you may need to swap in an additional, charged battery or attach AC power during the movie to view it in its entirety. Prolonged use of the optical drive, such as when watching a DVD movie, will substantially reduce your note-
books battery life. An additional fully-charged battery is highly recommended if you will be watching DVD movies on battery power. If you dont have an additional battery, you may purchase one either on-line at us.fujitsu.com/computers or call 1-877-372-3473. To Watch a Movie on Battery Power:
1. Have an additional full-charged battery or your AC adapter ready for use. 2. Start watching your DVD movie. 3. When the low battery warning occurs, immediately stop the movie and exit the DVD/CD-RW application. If you do not stop the optical drive quickly and the LifeBook notebook attempts to auto-suspend (critical battery low state) the notebook will shut down improperly. If this occurs, you will need to install a fresh power source (either a charged battery or AC Adapter). 4. Connect an AC Adapter to your system, or install a fully charged battery in the Flexible Bay (after removing any modular devices that may be present in the bay) prior to removing the main battery. 5. Manually place your notebook into suspend mode by depressing the Suspend button then replace the discharged battery with a fully-charged battery. 6. If you removed the optical drive from the Flexible Bay in step 4, reinstall it now. 7. Resume your notebook by pressing the Suspend button again. This step is not required if you attached AC power without entering suspend mode. 8. Restart your DVD/CD-RW application and skip to the chapter of the movie you were last watching. 9. Continue watching your DVD movie. 36 P7010.book Page 37 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s PC Card Slot PC Card Eject Button Figure 4-8 Installing/Removing PC Cards PC Cards Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook supports Type I and II PC Cards, which can perform a variety of functions. Some available PC Cards:
Fax/data modem cards Local area network (LAN) cards IDE solid-state disk cards SCSI cards Wireless LAN cards Other PC Cards that conform to PCMCIA 2.1 or CardBus standards For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with your PC Card. INSTALLING PC CARDS PC Cards are installed in the PC Card slot. To install a PC Card, follow these easy steps: (Figure 4-8) Installing or removing a PC Card during your LifeBook notebooks shutdown or bootup process may damage the card and/or your notebook. Do not insert a PC Card into a slot if there is water or any other substance on the card as you may permanently dam-
age the card, your LifeBook notebook, or both. 1. See your PC Card manual for specific instructions on the installation of your card. Some PC Cards may require your notebook to be Off while installing them. 2. Make sure there is no PC Card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing PC Cards. 3. Insert your PC Card into the slot, with the product label facing up. 4. Push the card into the slot firmly until it is seated in the opening. You will hear a click and the Eject button will pop away from your notebook. REMOVING PC CARDS To remove a PC Card, follow these easy steps:
Windows has a shutdown procedure for PC Cards that must be followed before removing a card. (Please review your oper-
ating system manual for the correct proce-
dure). 1. See your PC Card manual for specific instructions on removing your card. Some PC Cards may require your notebook to be in Suspend Mode or Off while removing them. If the dialog box states that the device cannot be removed, you must save all of your open files, close any open applica-
tions and shut down your notebook. 2. Push the Eject button in until it is flush with the notebook. This will push the PC Card slightly out of the slot allowing you to remove the card. If the PC Card has an external connector and cable, do not pull the cable when removing the card. 37 P7010.book Page 38 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r CF Card Slot CF Card Eject Button Figure 4-9 Installing/Removing CF Cards Compact Flash Cards Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook supports Compact Flash (CF) cards, which can perform a variety of func-
tions. Some available CF Cards:
Memory cards Fax/data modem cards Local area network (LAN) cards Wireless LAN (802.11b) cards For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with your CF Card. INSTALLING CF CARDS CF Cards are installed in the CF Card slot. To install a CF Card, follow these steps: (Figure 4-9) Installing or removing a CF Card during your LifeBook notebooks shutdown or bootup process may damage the card and/or your notebook. Do not insert a CF Card into a slot if there is water or any other substance on the card as you may permanently dam-
age the card, your LifeBook notebook, or both. 1. See your CF Card manual for specific instructions on the installation of your card. Some CF Cards may require your notebook to be Off while installing them. 2. When you receive your LifeBook, there will be a protective plug installed in the slot. Whenever you dont have a CF Card installed, be sure to replace the plug to prevent system contamination. To remove 38 the plug, press the CF Card eject button. (Figure 4-
10) CF Slot Plug CF Eject Button Figure 4-10 Removing CF Slot plug 3. When the CF Slot plug is ejected, remove it from the slot. 4. Insert your CF Card into the slot, with the product label facing up. Figure 4-11 Installing a CF Card 5. Push the card into the slot firmly until it is seated in the opening. You will hear a click and the Eject button will pop away from your notebook. U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s P7010.book Page 39 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM REMOVING CF CARDS To remove a CF Card, follow these easy steps:
Windows has a shutdown procedure for CF Cards that must be followed before removing a card. (Please review your operating system manual for the correct procedure). 1. See your CF Card manual for specific instructions on removing your card. Some CF Cards may require your notebook to be in Suspend Mode or Off while removing them. If the dialog box states that the device cannot be removed, you must save all of your open files, close any open applica-
tions and shut down your notebook. 2. Push the Eject button in until it is flush with the notebook. This will push the CF Card slightly out of the slot allowing you to remove the card. Figure 4-12 Removing a CF Card 39 P7010.book Page 40 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Memory Stick Memory Stick/SD Card Slot Note: A Memory Stick is used for illustration purposes. Figure 4-13. Installing a Memory Stick/SD Card Memory Stick/
Secure Digital Slot Your LifeBook notebook supports the following memory cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. SD Memory Card Memory Stick Media Memory Stick Select Media Memory Stick Duo Media Memory Stick PRO Media
Some of the media in the above list may have more features than others.
An adapter is required for Memory Stick Duo.
Copyright Protection Technology can-
not be used.
MultiMedia Cards (MMC) and Secure MMC are not supported. Memory Stick is a flash memory technology developed by Sony Electronics. Memory Stick allows you to record, transfer and share digital content, such as digital pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and applications. Secure Digital (SD) Cards are very similar to Memory Sticks, but they are shorter. Like the Memory Stick, SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery 40 consumption. Like the memory stick, it uses flash memory architecture. Figure 4-14. Memory Stick and Secure Digital Card INSTALLING MEMORY STICK/SD CARDS Memory Sticks and SD Cards are installed in the Memory Stick/SD Card slot (Figure 4-13). To install a Memory Stick or SD Card, follow these steps:
Installing or removing a Memory Stick or SD Card during your LifeBook note-
books shutdown or bootup process may damage the card and/or your LifeBook notebook. Do not insert a card into a slot if there is water or any other substance on the card as you may permanently damage the card, your LifeBook notebook, or both. 1. See your Memory Stick or SD Card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your notebook is off while installing them. 2. Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing a Memory Stick/SD Card. M e m o r y S t i c k / S D C a r d P7010.book Page 41 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 3. Insert your PC Card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4. Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. REMOVING A MEMORY STICK/SD CARD To remove a Memory Stick or SD Card, follow these easy steps:
See your Memory Stick or SD Card manual for specific instructions on the removal of your card. Some cards may require your LifeBook notebook to be in Suspend Mode or Off while removing them. Push the Memory Stick or SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 41 P7010.book Page 42 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Memory Upgrade Module Your LifeBook notebook can be upgraded to include up to 1 GB of in-slot high speed Double Data Rate (DDR) Synchronous Dynamic RAM (SDRAM). To increase your LifeBook notebooks memory capacity, you may install a larger memory upgrade module. Your LifeBook notebook has two micro DIMM slots. If you have less than 1 GB pre-installed, and you would like to increase it, you will need to remove the installed module and replace it with the larger module or add a new module to an empty slot. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (micro DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100% compatibility, purchase the memory module only from the Fujitsu web store at us.fujitsu.com/computers. REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE 1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of Accessing the Memory Compartment. 2. Pull the module clips sideways away from each side of the memory module simultaneously. (Figure 4-
16) Module Clip The memory upgrade module can be severely damaged by electrostatic dis-
charge (ESD). Be sure you are properly grounded when handling and installing the module. Figure 4-16. Removing a memory module 3. While holding the clips out, remove the module from the slot by lifting it up and pulling towards the back of your LifeBook notebook. ACCESSING THE MEMORY COMPARTMENT To gain access to the memory compartment, follow these steps:
You must turn off power and remove any modem connection before installing the memory upgrade module. 1. Turn off power to your LifeBook notebook, and remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline), battery pack, and modem connection. 2. Place your LifeBook notebook with the bottom facing up on a clean work surface. 3. Remove the two screws from the holes in the memory compartment cover. (Figure 4-15) Figure 4-15. Removing screws from memory compartment cover There is already a memory module pre-
installed when you receive your system. In order to increase the memory, you must first remove the old memory chip. 42 4. Store the memory upgrade module in a static 5. guarded sleeve. Install a new memory module as detailed in the procedure below. 6. Replace the memory compartment cover. INSTALLING A MEMORY MODULE 1. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module, chip side up, with the connector slot in the compartment. (Figure 4-17) Figure 4-17. Installing a memory module 2 . Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45o angle and press it firmly onto the connector. 3. Press the memory upgrade module down into the compartment until it locks underneath the retaining clip. You will hear a click when it is properly in place.
(Figure 4-17) P7010.book Page 43 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s The memory upgrade module is not something you routinely remove from your LifeBook notebook. Once it is installed, you should leave it in place unless you want to increase system memory capacity. CHECKING THE MEMORY CAPACITY Once you have changed the system memory capacity by replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure to check that your notebook has recognized the change. Check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] ->
Settings -> Control Panel, then double-clicking the System icon. Select the General tab and check the amount of memory under Computer:. There may be a variation between the actual memory size and what is displayed. This is due to the fact that your system uses a video graphics chip which dynami-
cally allocates system memory to accelerate graphics performance. Up to 64 MB of memory is dynamically shared on an as-needed basis using Dynamic Video Memory Technology (DVMT). If the total memory displayed is incorrect, check that your memory upgrade module is properly installed. (If the module is properly installed and the capacity is still not correctly recognized, see Trouble-
shooting on page 67. 43 P7010.book Page 44 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r Device Ports Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook comes equipped with multiple ports to which you can connect external devices such as disk drives, keyboards, printers, etc. MODEM (RJ-11) TELEPHONE PORT The modem (RJ-11) telephone port is used for an internal modem. To connect the telephone cable follow these easy steps:
1. Align the connector with the port opening
(Figure 4-18). 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cable into a tele-
phone outlet. Figure 4-18 Modem Port Figure 4-19 Connecting the Modem The modem sound is deactivated by default, to activate modem sound follow these easy steps:
1. Right click on the Speaker icon in your system tray. 2. Select Open Volume. 3. Select Option/Properties. 4. Under Show the following volume controls, click on Phone and click OK. 5. Uncheck the Mute box under Phone Balance. 44 The internal modem is not intended for use with Digital PBX systems. Do not con-
nect the internal modem to a Digital PBX as it may cause serious damage to the internal modem or your entire LifeBook notebook. Consult your PBX manufac-
turers documentation for details. Some hotels have Digital PBX systems. Be sure to find out BEFORE you connect your modem. The internal modem is designed to the ITU-T V.90 standard. Its maximum speed of 53000bps is the highest allowed by FCC, and its actual connec-
tion rate depends on the line conditions. The maximum speed is 33600bps at upload. The internal modem on all Fujitsu Life-
Book notebooks are registered for use in the United States and Canada. The modem may be certified in other coun-
tries. INTERNAL LAN (RJ-45) PORT The internal LAN (RJ-45) port is used for an internal Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-T/Tx) connection. If your notebook has been configured with internal LAN capability you will need to configure your notebook to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps:
1. Open the protective cover on the right side of the system (Figure 4-20). 2. Align the connector with the port opening. 3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 4. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. Figure 4-20 LAN Port P7010.book Page 45 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM IEEE 1394 PORT The IEEE 1394 port (also known as Firewire or iLink) allows you to connect devices that are compliant with IEEE standard 1394. This port is effec-
tively a very fast communications port. Some digital devices - such as digital cameras - use IEEE 1394 ports for fast transfer of digital files and data. In order to connect an IEEE 1394 device, follow these steps:
1. Open the protective cover on the right side of the system (Figure 4-21). 2. Align the connector with the port opening. 3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. Figure 4-21 IEEE 1394 Port S-VIDEO OUT PORT (TV OUT) The S-Video port allows you to connect and use directly any S-Video device, such as a VCR or television. The S-Video standard provides for a higher quality picture than NTSC or PAL. In order to connect an S-Video device, follow these easy steps:
U s e r I n s t a l l a b l e F e a t u r e s UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS PORTS The Universal Serial Bus 2.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices such as external game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. USB 2.0 is much faster than USB 1.1 (Its 480Mbps transfer rate is 40 times faster than that of USB 1.1). USB 2.0 ports are backward-compatible to work with USB 1.1 devices. In order to connect a USB device follow these easy steps:
1. Align the connector with the port opening. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. USB Port USB Port Figure 4-23 USB Ports HEADPHONE JACK The headphone allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your notebook. Your head-
phones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8 (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect headphones or speakers follow these easy steps:
The headphone and optical digital audio out share the same jack. 1. Align the connector with the port opening. Figure 4-22 S-Video Out Port Headphone/Optical Digital Audio Out Jack 1. Open the protective cover on the right side of the Figure 4-24 Headphone/Optical Digital Audio Out Jack system (Figure 4-22). 2. Align the connector with the port opening. 3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. If you plug headphones into the head-
phone jack, the built-in stereo speakers will be disabled. 45 P7010.book Page 46 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F o u r OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO CONNECTOR The optical digital audio-out connector allows you to download digital audio to MiniDisc recorders. It uses SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface) format. Use the following setting when using the digital audio-out connector. MICROPHONE JACK The microphone jack allows you to connect an external mono microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mono mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your notebook. In order to connect a microphone follow these easy steps:
When headphones or a SPDIF cable is installed, the speakers are disabled. Before using the SPDIF function, make sure that WinDVD software is installed on your system. Certain older CDs and DVDs will not work in conjunction with the SPDIF con-
nector. 1. Connect the MiniDisc recorder or external speaker to the Optical Digital Audio-Out Connector.
(Figure 4-24) Microphone Jack Figure 4-25 Microphone jack 1. Align the connector with the port opening (Figure 4-
2. Insert the disk you want to play in the DVD/CD-RW 25). tray. 2. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3. Click on Start -> Programs -> InterVideo WinDVD. (In Windows XP systems, you can go directly from Start to InterVideo WinDVD.) 4. When the WinDVD interface appears, right-click in the WinDVD window and select [Setup] from the menu. 5. Click on the Audio tab and select Enable S/PDIF output. 6. Click [Apply]. EXTERNAL MONITOR PORT The external monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor. In order to connect a monitor follow these easy steps:
1. Open the protective cover on the right side of the system (Figure 4-26). 2. Align the connector with the port opening. 3. Push the connector into the port until it is seated. The frequency of the digital sound output from the SPDIF output connector is fixed to 48KHz. If a sampling rate convertor is not installed in your connecting digital electronic device
(e.g., MD player), recording is not possible. Please see the user manuals for the electronic devices for further details. The sound recorded through connecting a digital electronic device (e.g., MD player) to the SPDIF output connector cannot be used as digital output. All output data from the SPDIF output connector has copyright protection information included. Please be careful, as there are several types of cables for connecting a digital electronic device (e.g., MD player) to the digital audio-out connector, depend-
ing on the connector type. The connec-
tor on your computer is an Optical Mini Plug (3.5mm diameter mini plug) 46 Figure 4-26 Installing the External Monitor Cable Pressing the [Fn] + [F10] keys allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the key combination, you will step to the next choice, starting with the built-in display panel only, moving to the external monitor only, finally moving to both the built-in display panel and an external monitor. P7010.book Page 47 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 5 Using the Integrated Wireless LAN 47 P7010.book Page 48 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n F I v e 48 P7010.book Page 50 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Before Using the Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to prop-
erly setup and configure the integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure it's correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Devices Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following three devices. Most of the procedures are identical. Sections that differ between the devices have been noted in the text:
Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connections
(802.11b/g): Available on LifeBook P7010 notebook model Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connections
(802.11a+b/g): Available on LifeBook P7010 notebook model Atheros AR5002X Mini-PCI wireless network card
(802.11a + b/g): Available on LifeBook P7010D note-
book model Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN devices operate in license-free RF bands, therefore eliminating the need to procure an FCC license to operate. All three WLAN devices operate in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band. Additionally, the Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG and Atheros AR5002X devices operate in the lower and middle bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG WLAN device is capable of two operating modes, IEEE802.11b and Figure 5-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network IEEE802.11g. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG and Atheros AR5002X WLAN devices are capable of three operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g. Encoding of data is modulated using Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Complementary Code Keying (CCK) when the WLAN device is operating in IEEE 802.11b mode and Orthogonal Frequency Divi-
sion Multiplexing (OFDM) when operating in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode. The WLAN device is Wi-Fi certified and operates at the maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The maximum communication range indoors is approximately 80 feet (25 meters). However, that range will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or inter-
ference from external RF sources. The WLAN device supports the following encryption methods - WEP, CKIP, TKIP, and AES encryption. WIRELESS LAN MODES USING THIS DEVICE Ad Hoc Mode
(See Figure 5-1)
"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks 50 P7010.book Page 51 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g. W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authenti-
cation, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode
(See Figure 5-2) Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network archi-
tecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or can communicate with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the wired LAN in order to access computers, devices, and services such as file servers, printers, and databases. How to Handle This Device The WLAN device comes pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The Oper-
ating System that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. WIRELESS NETWORK CONSIDERATIONS The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG WLAN device sup-
ports IEEE802.11b and IEEE802.11g. The Intel PRO/
Wireless 2915ABG and Atheros AR5002X WLAN Figure 5-2. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG WLAN device oper-
ates in the 2.4GHz ISM band. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG and Atheros AR5002X WLAN devices oper-
ate in the 2.4GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. The maximum range of the WLAN device indoors is typically 80 feet (25 meters). Please note that the max-
imum range you achieve may be shorter or longer than 80 feet, depending on factors such as access point transmit power, number and density of obstructions, or external RF interference. Microwave ovens will interfere with the operation of WLAN device as microwave ovens operate in the same 2.4GHz frequency range that IEEE802.11b/g devices operate in. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4GHz fre-
quency range may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and large amounts of frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure the proper operation of the WLAN device. Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*
Wireless LAN
*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. 51 ACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows using the Intel PROSet Software or Atheros Software P7010.book Page 52 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e DEACTIVATING THE WLAN DEVICE Deactivation of the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). Fujitsu mobile computers employ two methods with which to deactivate the WLAN device:
Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, using the Intel PROSet Software or Atheros Client Utility software. Deactivation using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and effi-
ciently by toggling the Wireless On/Off Switch to the Off position. (Figure 5-3) The Wireless On/Off switch has no effect on non-Wire-
less LAN models. Wireless LAN On/Off Switch On Off Figure 5-3. Wireless LAN On/Off Switch Location Deactivation using the Intel PROSet Software The WLAN device can also be deactivated in Windows using the Intel PROSet Software. The procedure to accomplish this:
1. 2. Click [Start]-> [All Programs]. Select Intel ProSet Wireless, then click on Intel ProSet Wireless from the menu that appears. The Intel ProSet Wireless utility will be displayed. 3. At the bottom left corner of the window, select Wireless Off from the dropdown list. Deactivation using Atheros Client Utility software 1. Right-click on Atheros Client Utility icon in the system tray. Select Open Atheros Client Utility from the menu. 2. Choose Action and click Disable Radio. 52 P7010.book Page 53 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Configuration of the WLAN Device W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e The WLAN Device can be configured to establish wire-
less network connectivity using one of the following tools:
Intel PROSet Software - The Intel PROSet Software allows for multiple profile setup and supports auto-
matic profile switching. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this soft-
ware. Procedure 1. Activate the WLAN device using either the Wireless On/Off Switch or the Intel PROSet software. 2. Click the [Start] button first and then [All Pro-
grams]. 3. Click the icon [Intel PROSet Wireless] to execute the Intel PROSet Wireless software. Atheros Client Utility - The Atheros Client Utility soft-
4. Click the [Add] button. The General Settings dialog ware allows for multiple profile setups and supports automatic profile switching. Support for most indus-
try standard security solutions is contained in this software. FLOW OF OPERATIONS 1. Activate the WLAN Device (See Activating the WLAN Device on page 52 for more information). 2. Configure the Wireless Network parameters (See displays. 5. 6. Enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. Enter the network SSID, in the Network Name
(SSID) field. 7. Click Infrastructure or Ad Hoc for the operating mode. 8. Click [Advanced]. Configure Wireless Network Parameters on page 53 for more information). 9. Enter the network name (SSID) Choose the appropriate WLAN architecture (Ad Hoc or Infrastructure) The Mandatory Access Point option is only used if Infrastructure mode is selected. Use this option to connect to a specific access point. Enter the MAC address for the access point. Click OK to save the setting and return to the General Settings page. 10. Click [Next]. Choose Authentication method: Open, Shared, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, WPA-
Personal, or WPA2-Personal 11. If using static WEP keys, enter static WEP key and choose key index. 3. Configure network settings (See Configure Net-
If you are using Cisco CCX, click Cisco Options to enable Cisco CKIP data encryption on the Security Settings page. Check the Cisco Compatible Exten-
sions Options. If you have checked the Cisco's
"Mixed-Cell" box in the Advanced Setting, this option must also be checked. work Parameters on page 53 for more information) 12. Click [OK]. TCP/IP settings Workgroup or Domain settings. CONFIGURATION USING INTEL PROSET SOFTWARE This section explains the procedure to properly configure the WLAN device using the Intel PROSet Soft-
ware. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network adminis-
trator for these parameters:
13. Click Next. 14. Select Open, Shared, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-
Enterprise, WPA-Personal, or WPA2-Personal in the Network Authentication options. 15. Select either None, WEP, CKIP (if Enable Cisco Cli-
ent eXtentions is enabled, use CKIP or WEP), or TKIP for the data encryption. 16. If WEP is selected, select either 64 or 128-bit for the Encryption Level. Network Name - Also known as the SSID 17. Select the key index 1, 2, 3 or 4. Network Key (WEP) - Required if using static WEP keys. Authentication Type - Open, Shared, WPA, or WPA-
PSK 18. Enter the WEP key if required. If your network does not employ a 802.1x/EAP security mechanism, please skip to step 24. 53 P7010.book Page 54 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e 19. Click the Enable 802.1x checkbox to enable the 802.1x security option. Please contact your network administrator if configuration of this setting is required. 5. 6. 20. Select the appropriate Authentication Type. Please contact your network administrator if configura-
tion of this setting is required. 21. After selecting your authentication type, enter the user name, domain, and password of the user you have created on the authentication server. The user name and password do not have to be the same as name and password of your current Windows user login. 22. Click [OK] to save the settings. 23. From the Intel ProSet Wireless page, click the new profile name shown in the Profile List. Use the up and down arrows to position the priority of the new profile in the priority list. 24. Click the Connect button to connect to the net-
work. 25. Click [Close] if you want to close the Intel(R) PROSet for Wireless window. CONFIGURATION USING ATHEROS CLIENT UTILITY SOFTWARE This section explains the procedure to properly configure the WLAN device using the Atheros Client Utility. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network adminis-
trator for these parameters:
Network Name - Also known as the SSID Network Key (WEP) - Required if using static WEP keys. Authentication Type - Open, Shared, WPA, or WPA-
PSK Procedure Activate the WLAN device using either the Wireless On/Off Switch or the Atheros Client Utility Right-click on the Atheros Client Utility icon in the system tray, and select Open Atheros Client Utility from the menu. From the Current Status page, click the Profile Management tab. If this is your first time using this utility, highlight the profile [Default] and Click the [Modify] button, otherwise Click the [New] button. The General Set-
tings dialog displays. 1. 2. 3. 4. 54 From the General page, enter a profile name in the Profile Name field. Enter the network SSID, in the SSID1 field. If you wish to create a profile that can connect to up to 3 different wireless networks, SSID's can be entered in the SSID2 and SSID3 fields as well. 7. Click the Security tab. The Security tab allows for the configuration of the Security modes listed in the table below. Please select the radio button of the desired security mode. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. 8. Field Name Description WPA WPA-PSK 802.1x Pre-Shared Key Enables the use of Wi-Fi Protected Access. Choosing WPA opens the WPA EAP drop-down menu. Options include TLS and PEAP. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Enables WPA-Pre-Shared Key. Click on the Configure button to enter the WPA Passphrase. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Enables 802.1x security. If these settings are not known to you, please consult with your network administrator for the correct settings. Choosing this option opens the 802.1x EAP type drop-down menu. Options include TLS, PEAP, and LEAP Enables the use of pre-shared keys that are defined on both the access point and the station. This is where static WEP keys are entered. Click the Configure button to fill in the Define Pre-Shared Keys window. None No security 9. Click OK 10. Click the Advanced tab 11. The Advanced tab allows for the configuration of the options detailed in the table below. P7010.book Page 55 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e
. Field Name Description Power Save Mode Network Type 802.11b Preamble Options are Maximum, Normal, or Off Options are AP (Infrastructure) or Ad Hoc Specifies the preamble setting in 802.11b. The default setting is Short and Long (Access Point mode), which allows both short and long headers in the 802.11b frames. Set to Long Only to override allowing short frames. 2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-
rently installed networks will be displayed. 4. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Proper-
ties] window will be displayed. 5. Click the [General] tab if it is not already selected. Transmit Power Level Options are 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5% or Lowest transmit power
(0mW) 6. Click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP] and then click
[Properties]. The [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] window will be displayed. Wireless Mode Wireless Mode when Starting Ad Hoc Network Specifies 5 GHz 54 Mbps, 5 GHz 108 Mbps, 2.4 GHz 11 Mbps, or 2.4 GHz 54 Mbps operation in an access point network. Specifies 5GHz 54 Mbps, 5 GHz 108 Mbps, 2.4 GHz 11 Mbps, or 2.4 GHz 54 Mbps to start an Ad Hoc network if no matching network name is found after scanning all available modes. 12. Click OK 13. If the profile you just created does not activate immediately, click the Profile Management tab, highlight the desired Profile, and click Activate. 14. Click [Close] if you want to close the Atheros Client Utility. CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK This section explains connection to the network. If there is an administrator of the network, contact the network administrator for data settings. Setting the network Perform the Setting TCP/IP and Confirming the computer and work group names operations required for network connection. Setting TCP/IP To change the setting of the IP address, you need to be logged in from Windows as an administrator. 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control Panel]. 7. Set the IP address as follows:
For ad hoc connection: Select [Use the following IP address:] and then enter data for [IP address]
and [Subnet mask]. See page 62 for IP address setting. For access point (infrastructure) connection: If your network uses DHCP, select [Obtain an IP address automatically] and [Obtain DNS server address automatically]. If your network uses static IP addresses, consult with your network adminis-
trator for the correct IP address settings. 8. Click the [OK] button. Processing will return to the
[Wireless Network Connection Properties] window. 9. Click the [OK] button. 10. Close the [Network Connection] window. Following this operation, confirm the names of the computer and the workgroup as follows. Confirming the computer and work group names To modify the computer name and/or the work group name, you need to be logged in from Windows as an administrator. 1. Click the [Start] button, then [Control Panel]. 2. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 3. Double-click the [System] icon. The [System Prop-
erties] window will be displayed. 4. Click the [Computer Name] tab. 55 P7010.book Page 56 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e 5. Confirm the settings of [Full computer name:] and 3. Double-click [Network Connections]. A list of cur-
[Workgroup:]. rently installed networks will be displayed. a. The setting of [Full computer name:] denotes the 4. name for identifying the computer. Any name can be assigned for each personal computer. Right-click [Wireless Network Connection] in the list, and then click [Properties] in the menu dis-
played. The [Wireless Network Connection Proper-
ties] window will be displayed. To change the name, click [Change] and then proceed in accordance with the instruction messages displayed on the screen. 5. If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-
works] is displayed, proceed to step 6. If [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] is not dis-
played, skip to step 7. Enter the desired name in less than 15 ASCII character code format. Identifiability can be enhanced by entering the model number, the user name, and other factors. 6. Make sure that the [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] check box is checked, and then click the [OK] button. Skip to Setting file-
sharing function. b. [Workgroup name] is the group name of the 7. Click [Install]. The [Select Network Component network. Enter the desired name in less than 15 ASCII character code format. For ad hoc connection: Assign the same network name to all personal computers existing on the network. For access point (infrastructure) connection:
Assign the name of the work group to be accessed. Type] window will be displayed. 8. Click [Service], then click the [Add] button. The
[Select Network Service] window will be displayed. 9. Click [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Net-
works] and then click the [OK] button. Processing will return to the [Wireless Network Connection Properties] window, and [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks] will be added to the list. 6. Click the [OK] button. If a message is displayed 10. Click the [Close] button. that requests you to restart the personal computer, click [Yes] to restart the computer. Setting the sharing function Set the sharing function to make file and/or printer sharing with other network-connected personal computers valid. This operation is not required unless the sharing func-
tion is to be used. The folder and printer for which the sharing function has been set will be usable from any personal computer present on the network. To share a file and/or the connected printer, you need to be logged in as an administrator. Setting the Microsoft network-sharing service 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Control Panel]. If the Control Panel is in Category view, switch to Classic view by clicking Switch to Classic View under Control Panel the left frame. (If you are already in Classic view, Switch to Category View will be displayed.) 2. 56 Setting the file-sharing function The procedure for setting the file-sharing function follows, with the work folder in drive C: as an example. 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [My Com-
puter]. 2. Double-click [Local disk (C:)]. 3. Right-click the work folder (or whichever folder you want to share), and then click [Sharing and Security...] in the menu displayed. The [Folder Name Properties] window will be displayed. Setting the file-sharing function for the file which has been used to execute Network Setup Wizard is suggested on the screen. For the wireless LAN, however, since security is guaranteed by entry of the network name (SSID) and the network key, the steps to be taken to set the file-
sharing function easily without using Network Setup Wizard are given below. 4. Click [Sharing] if it isnt already selected. P7010.book Page 57 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 5. Click the link stating If you understand the secu-
rity risks, but want to share files without running the wizard, click here. 6. Click Just enable file sharing and click [OK]. 7. Check the [Share this folder on the network] check box. To specify the corresponding folder as a read-only folder, select the [Read only]
checkbox under the General tab. 8. Click the [OK] button. The folder will be set as a sharable folder, and the display of the icon for the work. folder will change. Setting the printer-sharing function 1. Click the [Start] button first and then [Printers and FAX]. A list of connected printers will be displayed. 2. Right-click the printer for which the sharing func-
tion is to be set, and then click [Sharing] in the menu displayed. The property window correspond-
ing to the selected printer will be displayed. Setting the printer-sharing function when Network Setup Wizard has been executed is suggested on the screen. For the wireless LAN, however, since security is guaranteed by entry of the network name (SSID) and the network key, the steps to be taken to set the printer-sharing function without using Network Setup Wizard are laid down below. 3. Click the [Sharing] tab. 4. Click [Share this printer]. W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Connecting your personal computer to another personal computer 1. Click [Start] first and then [My Computer]. The
[My Computer] window will be displayed in the left frame. 2. Click [My Network Places] in the Other Places list. The window [My Network Places] will be dis-
played. 3. Click [View workgroup computers] under Network Tasks in the left frame. 4. Double-click the personal computer to which your personal computer is to be connected. The folder that was specified in Setting the file-sharing func-
tion on page 56 will be displayed. 5. Double-click the folder to be accessed. Confirming the status of the radio 1. Right-click the Intel PRO Wireless icon in the lower right corner of the screen. 2. Click [Open Intel PROSet for Wireless]. The Intel PROSet for Wireless window opens. 3. Contained within the General tab and the Details section (accessed by pressing the [Details] button), you will find the current operating status of the radio. (When the radio is turned off or the com-
puter is not yet connected, some of the conditions will not be displayed.) Profile Name The current configuration profile is displayed. Network Name (SSID) Displays the Network Name (SSID) currently used by the radio. IP Address 5. Enter the sharing printer name in [Share name]. The IP address of the current profile. 6. Click the [OK] button. Confirming connection After you have finished the network setup operations, access the folder whose sharing has been set for other personal computers. Also, confirm the status of the radio waves in case of trouble such as a network connection failure. In the case of access point (infrastructure) connection, enter the necessary data for the access point before confirming connection. Refer to the manual of the access point for the access point setup procedure. Signal Quality Displays a message stating the current quality of the signal. Signal Strength Displays a graphic representation of the current signal strength. Additionally, in the lower section of the display, you will see a variety of different measurements related to the WLAN. For additional information about the items, click on the Help? button:
Adapter MAC Address Band Supported Data Rates 57 P7010.book Page 58 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Radio Frequency Channel Number Network Authentication Data Encryption 802.1x Authentication Type 802.1x Authentication Protocol CCX Version CCX TPC CCX Power Levels Access Point MAC Address Mandatory Access Point 58 P7010.book Page 59 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Troubleshooting W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set the network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. For the method of setting network authentication, refer to the following page:Assigning parameters on page 53 Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after short-
ening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better sight. To check the wave condition, refer to the following page: Confirming the status of the radio waves on page 57. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled Check if the wireless switch is turned ON. Also verify Disable Radio is not checked in Network setting window. Refer to Starting Transmis-
sion on page 52. The computer to be connected is turned off Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Wireless network authentication has failed Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a mis-configured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Incorrectly configured network settings Recheck the configuration of your network settings. For the method of checking, refer to the following page:Connection to the Network on page 55. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 59 P7010.book Page 60 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e Wireless LAN Glossary Ad Hoc Mode MAC address (Media Access Control Address) Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. For details, refer to Ad hoc connection on page 50. A MAC address (also called an Ethernet address or IEEE MAC address) is the 48-bit address (typically written as twelve hexadecimal digits, 0 through 9 and A through F, or as six hexadecimal numbers separated by periods or colons, e.g., 0080002012ef, 0:80:0:2:20:ef) which uniquely identifies a computer that has an Ethernet interface. Channel MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) The maximum size of data which can be transmitted at one time in networks including the Internet. In an envi-
ronment whose maximum size of data is too large to correctly receive data, normal communications can be restored by setting the size of MTU to a smaller value. A protocol that provides a means to dynamically allocate IP addresses to computers on a local area network. Network key DNS (Domain Name System) A data query service that provides a mechanism with which to translate host names into Internet addresses. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. IP address The logical 32-bit host address defined by the Internet Protocol that uniquely identifies a computer on a network. The IP address is usually expressed in dotted decimal notation. LAN (Local Area Network) A LAN or Local Area Network is a computer network (or data communications network) which is confined to a limited geographical area. Data that is used for encrypting data in data communi-
cation. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Security Set Identifier) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). In order to improve security, the network key is set allowing no communication unless Network name
(SSID) coincides with the network key. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 stan-
dard that performs no authentication checks on a wire-
less client before allowing it to associate. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) A method of allowing the authentication protocol adopted in telephone line connection (PPP) to be used over an Ethernet. Protocol A procedure or rule of delivering data among computers. Ordered data communication is allowed by making all conditions required for communication including the method of data transmission/reception and actions upon communication errors into proce-
dures. 60 W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e P7010.book Page 61 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentica-
tion is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-text challenge and the same chal-
lenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the WEP key. SSID (Service Set Identifier) Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) A standard protocol of the Internet. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi, or Wireless Fidelity, is a set of standards for wire-
less local area networks (WLAN) based on the IEEE 802.11 specifications. Certified products can use the official Wi-Fi logo, which indicates that the product is interoperable with any other product also showing that logo. 61 P7010.book Page 62 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e IP address information IP addressing is much more complicated than can be briefly explained in this document. You are advised to consult with your network administrator for additional information. If IP address is unknown, set IP address as follows:
If you have an access point (DHCP server) on the network, set the IP address as follows:
[Obtain an IP address automatically]
A DHCP server is a server that automatically assigns IP addresses to computers or other devices in the network. There is no DHCP server for the AdHoc network. If the IP address is already assigned to the computer in the network, ask the network administrator to check the IP address to be set for the computer. If no access point is found in the network:
An IP address is expressed with four values in the range between 1 and 255. Set the each computer as follows: The value in paren-
theses is a subnet mask.
<Example>
Computer A: 192.168.100.2 (255.255.255.0) Computer B: 192.168.100.3 (255.255.255.0) Computer C: 192.168.100.4 (255.255.255.0)
Computer X: 192.168.100.254 (255.255.255.0) 62 P7010.book Page 63 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Specifications Item Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Number of channels Security W I r e l e s s L A N U s e r s G u i d e Specification The Atheros AR5002X and the Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connections WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a and 802.11b/g (Wi-Fi based)*. The Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connections WLAN device conforms to 802.11b/g
(Wi-Fi based)
(Automatic switching) IEEE 802.11a/g: 54 Mbps maximum data rate IEEE 802.11b: 11 Mbps maximum data rate 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels Encryption Types - CKIP, WEP, TKIP, AES**
WPA 1.0 compliant Encryption Keylengths Supported: 64 bits, 128 bits, and 152 bits
(Atheros module using AES encryption only) Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 802.1x/EAP 10 units or less ***
* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.
** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/
104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.
*** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 63 P7010.book Page 64 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 S e r i e s N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n F i v e 64 P7010.book Page 65 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 6 Troubleshooting 65 P7010.book Page 66 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x 66 P7010.book Page 67 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Troubleshooting Your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook is sturdy and subject to few problems in the field. However, you may encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices, that you can solve by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward problems and identify failures that require service. IDENTIFYING THE PROBLEM If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:
1. Turn off your LifeBook notebook. 2. Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your note-
book and to an active AC power source. 3. Make sure that any card installed in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4. Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5. Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6. Go through the boot sequence. 7. If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. 8. If you are still having problems after referring to the Troubleshooting Table, go to the Fujitsu Computer Systems Support website (http://www.computers.us
.fujitsu.com/support), and search the list of Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) contained there. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g If you keep notes about what you have tried, your support representative may be able to help you more quickly by giving additional suggestions over the phone. 9. If you have tried the solutions suggested above without success, contact your support representative:
Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Fax: 408-764-2724 E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com Web site:
http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support represen-
tative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:
Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your notebook for configuration and serial numbers. (See figure 2-7 on page 11 for location) SPECIFIC PROBLEMS Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your LifeBook notebook, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your notebook. 67 P7010.book Page 68 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE Problem Page Audio Problems . page 68 DVD/CD-RW Drive Problems . page 68 Floppy Disk Drive Problems . page 69 Hard Drive Problems . page 69 Keyboard or Mouse Problems. page 69 Memory Problems . page 70 Modem Problems . page 70 Problem Page USB Device Problems . page 70 PC Card Problems . page 70 Power Failures . page 71 Shutdown and Startup Problems . page 72 Video Problems . page 73 Miscellaneous Problems . page 74 Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Audio Problems There is no sound coming from the built-in speakers. The software volume control is set too low. Adjust the sound volume control settings in your software, operating system and applications. Headphones are plugged into your notebook. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers; remove the headphones. BIOS audio settings are incorrect. Set the BIOS setup utility to the default values within the Multimedia Device Configuration menu. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Software driver is not configured correctly. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. DVD/CD-RW Drive Problems LifeBook notebook fails to recognize DVD/CD-RW disc Protective sheet is still in the DVD/CD-RW drive tray. Remove the protective sheet from the tray. The disc is not pushed down onto raised center of the drive. Open DVD/CD-RW tray and re-install DVD/CD-RW disc properly. DVD/CD-RW drive tray is not latched shut. Push on the front of the DVD/CD-RW drive tray until it latches. Incorrect DVD Player or no DVD Player software is installed. Install DVD Player software. (See Using the Optical Drive Software on page 35 for more information.) Wrong drive designator was used for DVD/CD-RW drive in the application. Verify the drive designator used by the application is the same as the one used by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a DVD/
CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Windows DVD/CD-RW auto insertion function is disabled. Start the DVD/CD-RW drive from the desktop or application software or re-enable the Windows DVD/CD-RW auto insertion function. (See Auto Insert Notification Function on page 36 for more information) DVD/CD-RW disc is dirty or defective. Wipe disc with non-abrasive cleaning cloth and reinsert. It if still will not work try a different disc. The Windows DVD/CD-RW auto insertion function is active and is checking to see if a DVD/
CD-RW disc is ready to run. This is normal. However, you may disable this feature. (See Auto Insert Notification Function on page 36 for more information) The DVD/CD-RW Access indicator on the Status Indicator Panel blinks at regular intervals when no disc is in the tray or the drive is not installed. 68 P7010.book Page 69 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Floppy Disk Drive Problems You cannot access your optional floppy disk. You tried to write to a write protected floppy disk. Eject the floppy disk and set it to write enable. (See Preparing a Disk for Use on page 33 for more informa-
tion) Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. Floppy disk is not loaded correctly. Eject floppy disk, check orientation and re-insert.
(See Ejecting a Disk on page 33 for more information) Security is set to protect access to floppy disk data. Verify your password and security settings. The setup utility is incorrectly set for your internal (Primary Master) or optional second hard drive (Primary Slave). Revise BIOS settings to set both Primary Master and Primary Slave correctly. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable CD-ROM was used to start the notebook. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Security is set so your operating system cannot be started without a password. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The notebook has gone into Suspend mode. Push the Suspend/Resume/Power On button. The characters that appear do not match those which you typed. You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Your application has locked out your keyboard. NumLk is set in the BIOS. Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your system. If this fails, turn your notebook off by pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume button for several seconds. After the system has been off for at least 10 seconds, turn it back on. Go to the BIOS and make sure that NumLk is disabled. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Your external device is not prop-
erly installed. Re-install your device. (See Device Ports on page 44 for more information) Your operating system software is not setup with the correct soft-
ware driver for that device. Your operating system software is not setup with the correct soft-
ware driver for that device. Your system has crashed. Check your device and operating system docu-
mentation and activate the proper driver. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Try to restart your notebook. If this fails, turn your notebook off by pressing the Power/Suspend/
Resume button for several seconds. After the system has been off for at least 10 seconds, turn it back on. 69 P7010.book Page 70 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Memory Problems Your Power On screen, or Info menu of the BIOS setup utility information, does not show the correct amount of installed memory. Modem Problems Messages about modem operation. USB Device Problems You have installed a USB device but your LifeBook notebook does not recog-
nize the device, or the device does not seem to work properly. PC Card Problems A card inserted in the PC Card slot does not work or is locking up the system. 70 Your memory upgrade module is not properly installed. You have a memory failure. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. (See Memory Upgrade Module on page 42 for more information) Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages.
(See Power On Self Test Messages on page 75 for more information) Messages about modem opera-
tion are generated by whichever modem application is in use. See your application software documentation for additional information. The device is not properly installed. Remove and re-install the device. (See Device Ports on page 44 for more information) The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your notebook is not aware of its installation. Close the application and restart your notebook. Your software may not have the correct software driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. You may have the wrong I/O address selected for your device. See your device documentation and software docu-
mentation to determine the required I/O address. Change the settings in the BIOS setup utility. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Your device and another device are assigned the same I/O address. Check all I/O addresses located within the BIOS setup utility and any other installed hardware or software to make sure there are no duplications. The card is not properly installed. Remove and re-install the card. (See PC Cards on page 37 for more information) The card may have been installed while an application was running, so your notebook is not aware of its installation. Close the application and restart your notebook. Your software may not have the correct software driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. You may have the wrong I/O address selected for your PC Card device. See your PC Card documentation to determine the required I/O address. Change the settings in the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Your PC Card device and another device are assigned the same I/O address. Check all I/O addresses located within the BIOS setup utility and any other installed hardware or software to make sure there are no duplications. P7010.book Page 71 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Power Failures You turn on your LifeBook notebook and nothing seems to happen. The installed primary battery is completely discharged, there is no optional second battery installed or there is no Power adapter installed. The primary battery is installed but is faulty. The battery or batteries are low. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the batteries. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence and condition of the batteries. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) If a battery is indicating a short, remove that battery and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the batteries. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery. The adapter (AC or auto/airline) is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. (See Power Sources on page 23 for more information) The Power adapter (AC or auto/
airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane seat jack, or the cars cigarette lighter. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. The Power adapter (AC or auto/
airline) is faulty. Try a different Power adapter or install a charged optional second battery. Your LifeBook notebook turns off all by itself. The power management param-
eters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. You are operating on battery power only and have ignored a low battery alarm until the battery is at dead battery state and your system has gone into Dead Battery Suspend mode. You have a battery failure. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/Resume button. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. Install a power adapter and then push the Suspend/
Resume button. (See Power Sources on page 23 for more information) Verify the condition of the batteries using the Status Indicator panel, and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Your LifeBook notebook will not work on battery alone. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. The installed batteries are dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a Power adapter. No batteries are installed. Install a charged battery. 71 P7010.book Page 72 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your LifeBook notebook will not work on battery alone.
(continued) The batteries seem to discharge too quickly. The batteries are improperly installed. Verify that the batteries are properly connected by re-installing them. Your installed batteries are faulty. You are running an application that uses a lot of power due to frequent hard drive or DVD/
CD-RW drive access, or use of a modem or LAN PC card. The power savings features may be disabled. Verify the condition of the batteries using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. (See Status Indicator Panel on page 12 for more information) Use both the primary battery and an optional second battery and/or use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Check the power management and/or setup utility settings in the Power Savings menu and adjust according to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses. The batteries are very old. Replace the batteries. The batteries have been exposed to high temperatures. The batteries are too hot or too cold. Replace the batteries. Restore the notebook to normal operating tempera-
ture. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when the battery is outside its operating range. Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume/
Power On button does not work. The system powers up, and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. The Suspend/Resume/Power On button is disabled from the Advanced submenu of the Power menu of the setup utility. You did not hold the button in long enough. There may be a conflict with the application software. Boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configuration. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Internal hard drive was not detected. Enable the button from the setup utility. Hold the button longer. This may need to be a few seconds if your application is preventing the CPU from checking for button pushes. Close all applications and try the button again. Set the operating source by pressing the [F12] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2]
key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source settings from the Boot menu. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup utility and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Use the BIOS setup utility to try to auto detect the internal hard drive. If this does not work, contact Fujitsu Service and Support at 1-800-8FUJITSU. 72 P7010.book Page 73 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g An error message is displayed on the screen during the notebook
(boot) sequence. Your notebook appears to change setup parameters when you start it. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. BIOS setup changes were not saved when you made them and exited the BIOS setup utility returning it to previous settings. The BIOS CMOS hold-up battery has failed. Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LifeBook notebook. The notebook is set for an external monitor only. The display angle and brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to determine the meaning and severity of the problem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. (See Power On Self Test Messages on page 75 for more information) Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external monitor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. The LifeBook notebook turned on with a series of beeps and your built-in display is blank. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. The power management time-
outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off. Press any button the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. (The display may be shut off by Standby mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The notebook is set for S-Video display only. While holding down the [Fn] key, click on the [F11]
key to toggle the S-Video display off. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a failure which does not allow the display to operate. Contact your support representative. The notebook has gone into Video timeout, Standby mode, Suspend mode or Hibernation mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. Check your power management settings to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) The power management time-
outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Suspend/
Resume button. (The display may be shut off by Standby Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Built-in Display does not close. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and the keyboard. Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. 73 P7010.book Page 74 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Built-in Display has bright or dark spots. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. The application display uses only a portion of your screen and is surrounded by a dark frame. You are running an application that does not support 800 x 600/
1024 x 768 pixel resolution display and display compression is enabled. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Display compression gives a clearer but smaller display for applications that do not support 800 x 600/1024 x 768 pixel resolution. You can fill the screen but have less resolution by changing your display compression setting, (See the Video Features submenu, located within the Advanced menu of the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) The display is dark when on battery power. The default is set on low bright-
ness to conserve power. Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness and adjust Power Control under battery settings. You have connected an external monitor and it does not display any information. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Toggle the video destination by pressing [Fn] and
[F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features submenu, located within the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) Your external monitor is not properly installed. Reinstall your device. (See External Monitor Port on page 46 for more information) Your operating system software is not setup with the correct soft-
ware driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Your external monitor is not compatible with your LifeBook notebook. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. (See Specifications on page 87 for more information) Miscellaneous Problems An error message is displayed on the screen during the operation of an application. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 74 P7010.book Page 75 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM POWER ON SELF TEST MESSAGES The following is an alphabetic list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check your operating system documentation both on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message and its meaning is not clear, contact your support representative for assistance. nnnn Cache SRAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of system cache in kilobytes success-fully tested by the Power On Self Test. (This can only appear if you have an SRAM PC Card installed.)
*Diskette drive A error or Diskette drive B error Drive A: or B: is present but fails the BIOS Power On Self Test diskette tests. Check to see that the drive is defined with the proper diskette type in the Setup Utility, (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 25 for more information) and that the diskette drive is installed correctly. If the disk drive is properly defined and installed, avoid using it and contact your support representative.
*Extended RAM Failed at offset: nnnn Extended memory not working or not configured prop-
erly. If you have an installed memory upgrade module, verify that the module is properly installed. If it is prop-
erly installed, you may want to check your Windows Setup to be sure it is not using unavailable memory until you can contact your support representative. nnnn Extended RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of memory in kilobytes successfully tested.
*Failing Bits: nnnn The hex number nnnn This is a map of the bits at the memory address (in System, Extended, or Shadow memory) which failed the memory test. Each 1 (one) in the map indicates a failed bit. This is a serious fault that may cause you to lose data if you continue. Contact your support representative.
*Fixed Disk x Failure or Fixed Disk Controller Failure (where x = 1-4) The fixed disk is not working or not configured properly. This may mean that the hard drive type identified in your setup utility does not agree with the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to check for the hard drive type settings and correct them if necessary. If the settings are OK and the message appears when you restart the system, there may be a serious fault which might cause you to lose data if you continue. Contact your support representative.
*Incorrect Drive A type run SETUP Type of floppy drive A: not correctly identified in Setup. This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g your setup utility does not agree with the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to correct the inconsistency.
*Incorrect Drive B type run SETUP Type of floppy drive B: not correctly identified in Setup. This means that the floppy disk drive type identified in your setup utility does not agree with the type detected by the Power On Self Test. Run the setup utility to correct the inconsistency.
*Invalid NVRAM media type Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have some display prob-
lems. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.
*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard error Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Keyboard error nn BIOS discovered a stuck key and displays the scan code for the stuck key. You may have to replace your keyboard but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.
*Monitor type does not match CMOS Run SETUP Monitor type not correctly identified in Setup. This error probably means your BIOS is corrupted, run the setup utility and set all settings to the default conditions. If you still get this error, contact your support representative.
*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted and your system may have to be re-installed from your back up media.
*Parity Check 1 nnnn Parity error found in the system bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially data destroying failure. Contact your support representative. 75 P7010.book Page 76 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x
*Parity Check 2 nnnn Parity error found in the I/O bus. BIOS attempts to locate the address and display it on the screen. If it cannot locate the address, it displays ????. This is a potentially data-destroying failure. Contact your support representative.
*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press the [F1] key to continue the boot process or the [F2]
key to enter Setup and change any settings.
*Previous boot incomplete Default configuration used Previous Power On Self Test did not complete success-
fully. The Power On Self Test will load default values and offer to run Setup. If the previous failure was caused by incorrect values and they are not corrected, the next boot will likely fail also. If using the default settings does not allow you to complete a successful boot sequence, you should turn off the power and contact your support representative.
*Real time clock error Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.
*Shadow RAM Failed at offset: nnnn Shadow RAM failed at offset nnnn of the 64k block at which the error was detected. You are risking data corrup-
tion if you continue. Contact your support representative. nnnn Shadow RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of shadow RAM in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System battery is dead Replace and run SETUP The BIOS CMOS RAM memory hold up battery is dead. This is part of your BIOS and is a board mounted battery which requires a support representative to change. You can continue operating but you will have to use setup utility default values or reconfigure your setup utility every time you turn off your notebook. This battery has an expected life of 2 to 3 years. System BIOS shadowed System BIOS copied to shadow RAM.
*System CMOS checksum bad run SETUP BIOS CMOS RAM has been corrupted or modified incorrectly, perhaps by an application program that changes data stored in BIOS memory. Run Setup and reconfigure the system.
*System RAM Failed at offset: nnnn System memory failed at offset nnnn of in the 64k block at which the error was detected. This means that there is a fault in your built-in memory. If you continue to operate, you risk corrupting your data. Contact your support representative for repairs. 76 nnnn System RAM Passed Where nnnn is the amount of system memory in kilobytes successfully tested.
*System timer error The timer test failed. The main clock that operates the computer is faulty. Requires repair of system board. Contact your support representative for repairs. UMB upper limit segment address: nnnn Displays the address of the upper limit of Upper Memory Blocks, indicating released segments of the BIOS memory which may be reclaimed by a virtual memory manager. Video BIOS shadowed Video BIOS successfully copied to shadow RAM. EMERGENCY DVD TRAY RELEASE If for some reason the eject button fails, you can open the DVD/CD-RW tray with a paper clip or similar tool inserted into the eject hole in the far right side of the front of the tray. Straighten one side of a paper clip and push it gently into the hole. The tray will pop out a short distance. MODEM RESULT CODES The operating system and application software that is factory installed detects the modem characteristics and provides the necessary command strings to operate the modem. The internal modem operation is controlled by generic AT commands from the operating system and application software. The standard long form result codes may, in some cases, be displayed on your screen to keep you informed of the actions of your modem. The operating system and application software may suppress display of the result codes. Examples of result codes are:
OK NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE CONNECT 53000 (Connection complete at 53,000 bps.) ERROR FAX RING (This means an incoming call.) BUSY NO ANSWER When using the internal modem with applications that are not factory installed refer to the application documentation. P7010.book Page 77 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Restoring Your Pre-installed Software The Drivers and Applications Restore (DAR) DVD contains sets of device drivers and Fujitsu utilities (in specific directories) that are unique to your notebook configuration for use as documented below. If you have access to the internet, visit the Fujitsu Support web site at http://
www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support to check for the most current information, drivers and hints on how to perform recovery and system updates. (See Automatically Downloading Driver Updates on page 78 for more information) Re-Installing Individual Drivers and Applications The Drivers and Applications CD can be used to selec-
tively re-install drivers and/or applications that may have been un-installed or corrupted. There may be certain free third-party applications pre-installed on your system that are not on the DAR CD. The latest versions of the applications can be downloaded from the third-partys website. To re-install drivers and/or applications:
1. Boot up the system and insert the DAR CD after Windows has started. A Fujitsu Installer screen is displayed after the CD is inserted. 2. After reading the License Agreement, click [I agree]. 3. A window will appear containing a list of applica-
tions, drivers, and utilities that you can install from the Drivers and Applications CD. The components listed are color-coded in terms of their install status. Blue indicates that the component can be installed. Green indicates that the component needs to be installed separately. Grey indicates a component that is already installed; grey items can be reinstalled, but prior to installation you will receive a reminder that the component is already installed. 4. In the list, check off all the components you want to install. If you want to install all components, click
[Select All]. Clicking [Select All] will select all of the blue-coded components; you must select grey and green components separately. 5. Once you have selected the components you wish to install, click [Install Selected Subsystems]; the components will be installed. T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g 6. After the components are installed, click [OK], then click [Yes] when asked if you want to reboot the system. RESTORING THE FACTORY IMAGE The Restore Disc that came with your system contains two utilities:
The Recovery utility allows you to restore the original contents of the C: drive. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility on this disc is used to delete all data on your hard disk and prevent it from being reused. Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions.
The use of this disc requires that you have a device capable of reading DVDs attached to your system. If you do not have a built-in DVD player, you will need to attach an external player. For more information on available external devices, visit our Web site at: us.fujitsu.com/
computers.
This disc can only be used with the system with which it was purchased. BOOT Priority Change Before restoring an image, you must first verify that your system is set up to boot from the DVD drive. To verify/
change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:
1. Start your system and press the [F2] key when the Fujitsu logo appears. You will enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. Using the arrow keys, go to the Boot menu. 3. Arrow down to the Boot Device Priority submenu. 4. 5. 6. Press [Enter]. If Optical Media Drive or CD-ROM Drive is not at the top of the list, arrow down to the drive in the list, and press the space bar (or the + key) to move it to the top of the list. (The system attempts to boot from the devices in the order in which they are listed.). Note that the BIOS for some systems will indicate CD-ROM Drive, even when a DVD drive is connected. If you have an external DVD drive connected, proceed to step 6; otherwise, proceed to step 7. If you have an external DVD drive connected:
Select the Advanced menu in the BIOS window.
Scroll down to the USB Features submenu and press the Enter key to open it. 77 AUTOMATICALLY DOWNLOADING DRIVER UPDATES Your system has a convenient tool called the Fujitsu Driver Update (FDU) utility. With FDU, you can choose to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to check for new updates for your system. The FDU icon should appear in the system tray at the bottom right of your screen (roll the cursor over the icons to find the correct one). If the FDU icon does not appear in the system tray, it can be started by going to
[Start] -> All Programs, and clicking on Fujitsu Driver Update; this will create the icon automatically. To invoke the FDU menu, right-click on the FDU icon. The menu contains the following items:
Check for updates now Allows for manual driver update search. The first time it is used, you are prompted to agree to a user agreement. After clicking on the icon, the FDU auto-
matically connects with the Fujitsu site to check for updates and downloads them. While downloading, the icon has a red bar through it, indicating that it cannot be used while the download is in process. When the update is complete, a message appears informing you of the fact. Enable Automatic Update Notifications Automatically searches for new updates on a regular basis (approximately every 3 days). Show update history Brings up a screen that displays a history of updates that have been made via the FDU. About Fujitsu Driver Update Displays the FDU version number and copyright information Fujitsu Driver Update Readme Displays the FDU readme. P7010.book Page 78 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S i x
If Legacy USB Support is disabled, press the space bar to enable it.
Scroll down to SCSI SubClass Support and press the space bar to enable it. 7. Press [F10], then click on [Yes] to exit the BIOS Setup Utility and return to the boot process. After you have changed the boot priority, you can restore a backup image when you are booting up. Procedure 1. 2. Turn on the power to your system. Ensure that you have a device that can read DVDs either installed in your system or attached exter-
nally to it. Insert the Restore Disc into the drive tray. Reboot your system. 3. 4. 5. After the system reboots, follow the instructions that appear to either restore your system image or erase all data from your hard disk. 78 P7010.book Page 79 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 7 Care and Maintenance 79 P7010.book Page 80 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S e v e n 80 P7010.book Page 81 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Care and Maintenance If you use your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the notebook and its devices. Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operations of this product or simi-
lar products, must always be supervised by an adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical products and do not permit them to handle any cables. Caring for your LifeBook notebook Your LifeBook notebook is a durable but sensitive elec-
tronic device. Treat it with respect and care. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely. Keep it away from food and beverages. If you accidentally spill liquid on your LifeBook note-
book:
1.Turn it off. 2.Position it so that the liquid can run out. 3.Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. 4.If your notebook will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative. Do not use your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your notebook. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. Do not expose your notebook to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your notebook. Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your LifeBook notebook in a brief-
case, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid. Never position your notebook such that the DVD/CD-
RW drive is supporting the weight of the notebook. Do not drop your notebook. Do not touch the screen with any sharp objects. C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e Cleaning your LifeBook notebook Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your LifeBook notebook with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Storing your LifeBook notebook If storing your notebook for a month or longer, turn your LifeBook notebook off, charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. Store your notebook and batteries separately. If you store your LifeBook with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addi-
tion, a faulty battery might damage your LifeBook. Store your Fujitsu LifeBook in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F (-10C) and 140F (60C). Traveling with your LifeBook notebook Do not transport your notebook while it is turned on. Do not check your notebook as baggage. Carry it with you. Always bring your backup disk and Drivers and Applications CD that came with your notebook when you travel. If you experience system software problems while traveling, you may need it to correct any prob-
lems. Never put your notebook through a metal detector. Have your notebook hand-inspected by security per-
sonnel. You can however, put your notebook through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place your notebook close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your notebook hand-inspected by security personnel. Secu-
rity officials may require you to turn your notebook On. Make sure you have a charged battery on hand. When traveling with the hard drive removed, wrap the drive in a non-conducting materials (cloth or paper). If you have the drive checked by hand, be ready to install the drive if needed. Never put your hard drive through a metal detector. Have your hard drive hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your hard drive through a properly tuned X-ray machine. Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling over-
seas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. 81 P7010.book Page 82 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S e v e n Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin America, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand BATTERIES Caring for your Batteries Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incin-
erate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. Increasing Battery Life Power your LifeBook notebook through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. If your notebook is running on battery power all day, connect it to the AC adapter overnight to recharge the battery. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable. Set the power management for maximum battery life. 82 Put your notebook in Suspend mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Limit your media drive access. Disable the DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive auto insert noti-
fication function. Always use fully charged batteries. Eject PCMCIATM cards when not in use. FLOPPY DISKS AND DRIVES Caring for your Floppy Disks Avoid using the floppy disks in damp and dusty locations. Never store a floppy disk near a magnet or magnetic field. Do not use a pencil or an eraser on a disk or disk label. Avoid storing the floppy disks in extremely hot or cold locations, or in locations subject to severe temperature changes. Store at temperatures between 50 F (10C) and 125F (52C). Do not touch the exposed part of the disk behind the metal shutter. Caring for your Floppy Disk Drive To clean, wipe the floppy disk drive clean with a dry soft cloth, or with a soft cloth dampened with water or a solution of neutral detergent. Never use benzene, paint thinner or other volatile material. Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in extremely hot or cold locations, or in locations subject to severe tempera-
ture changes. Store at temperatures between 50 F (10 C) and 125F (52 C). Keep the floppy disk drive out of direct sunlight and away from heating equipment. Avoid storing the floppy disk drive in locations subject to shock and vibration. Never use the floppy disk drive with any liquid, metal, or other foreign matter inside the floppy disk drive or disk. Never disassemble or dismantle your floppy disk drive. P7010.book Page 83 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM C a r e a n d M a i n t e n a n c e MEDIA CARE Caring for your Media (DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM) Media discs are precision devices and will function reli-
ably if given reasonable care. Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures. PC CARDS Caring for your PC Cards PC Cards are durable, but you must treat them with care. The documentation supplied with your PC Card will provide specific information, but you should pay attention to the following points:
To keep out dust and dirt, store PC Cards in their protective sleeves when they are not installed in your LifeBook notebook. Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or Do not bend media discs or set heavy objects on them. excessive heat. Do not spill liquids on media discs. Keep the cards dry. Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not place heavy objects on top of them. Do not force cards into the slot. Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to excessive vibration. Do not scratch media discs. Do not get dust on media discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a media disc is subjected to a sudden change in tem-
perature, cold to warm condensation may form on the surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. If a disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. Caring for your DVD/CD-RW Drive Your DVD/CD-RW drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:
The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be sub-
jected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the DVD/CD-RW drive. Occasional use of a commercially available lens cleaner kit is recommended to maintain your drive. 83 P7010.book Page 84 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n S e v e n 84 P7010.book Page 85 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 8 Specifications 85 P7010.book Page 86 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n E i g h t 86 P7010.book Page 87 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM S p e c i f i c a t i o n s Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. CONFIGURATION LABEL The configuration label located on the bottom of your LifeBook notebook (See figure 2-7 on page 11 for location) contains information regarding the options youve chosen for your notebook. Following is an example label and information on how to read your own configuration label. Part Number Configuration ID Configuration P/N: AWPXXXXXXXXXXXXX FPC P/N: FPCMXXXXXX P7010, PM ULV 733, 10.6 WXGA, 256M, 60G, MODEM/LAN/WLAN, WIN XPH Model #
Processor Screen Size Memory Hard Drive Communications Operating System Figure 8-1 Configuration Label MICROPROCESSOR Intel Pentium M Ultra Low Voltage (ULV) or Intel Celeron M Ultra Low Voltage (ULV). For the processor speed of your LifeBook, check the configuration label. 400 MHz system bus speed 64 KB L1 cache memory 2 MB on-die L2 cache memory (Pentium) or 512 KB
(Celeron) MEMORY System Memory 256 MB minimum, 1 GB maximum, micro-DIMM DDR SDRAM Two micro-DIMM slots 256 MB and 512 MB memory modules are available BIOS Memory 1 MB Firmware Hub (FWH) Flash ROM VIDEO Built-in color 10.6 Wide XGA Crystal View TFT active matrix LCD display with simultaneous display capability Video Color and Resolution 10.6" TFT Wide XGA Internal: 1280 x 768 pixel resolution, 16M colors External: 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M colors Simultaneous Video = Yes (1024 x 768, 16M colors) XGA, SVGA and VGA compatible Video RAM Intel 855GME or 852GML video graphics chip with integrated 32-bit 3D/2D gfx core and Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) support. Up to 64 MB shared video memory using Dynamic Video Memory Technology 2.0. AUDIO Realtek ALC203 codec with 18-bit stereo audio Stereo headphone/Optical Digital (SPDIF) port Mono microphone jack, 100 mVrms max. Dolby Headphone signal processing utility (in the InterVideo DVD software) Two built-in stereo speakers, 25 mm x 14 mm, bass reflex Built-in microphone on palm rest MASS STORAGE DEVICE OPTIONS Hard Drive 40 GB, 60 GB, or 80 GB fixed hard drive, 2.5, ATA 100 Modular DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 8x DVD / 10x CD-RW / 24x CD-R / 24x CD-ROM Modular Multi-Format DVD Writer 2x DVD-R, 2x DVD-RW, 2.4x DVD+R, 2.4x DVD+RW, 2x DVD-RAM, 8x DVD-ROM, 24x CD-R, 10x CD-RW, 24x CD-ROM FEATURES Communications Modem: Internal V.90 standard 56K* fax/modem
(ITU V.90, 56K data, 14.4K fax) LAN: 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Integrated Intel PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connections (802.11b/g*) with Antenna On/Off switch (available in LifeBook P7010 model), or, Integrated Intel PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connections (802.11a+b/g**) with Antenna On/Off switch (available in LifeBook P7010 model), or, Integrated Atheros Super AG Wireless LAN (802.11a/
b/g**) with Antenna On/Off switch (available in Life-
Book P7010D model) Optional Bluetooth device for wireless personal area network communication
* Operates at 2.4 GHz; communications range may vary, depending upon environment.
** Operates at 2.4 GHz and 5.0 GHz; communications range may vary, depending upon environment. 87 P7010.book Page 88 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n E i g h t Integrated Pointing Device Touchpad pointing device with scroll button. (Scroll button is replaced with optional fingerprint sensor in some configurations) Theft Prevention Lock Slot Slot for use with physical restraining security systems. DEVICE PORTS PC Card slot for one Type II card: PCMCIA Standard 2.1 with CardBus support One connector for external monitor
(see Display specifications) One Compact Flash Card slot One SD/Memory Stick slot Two USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices One S-Video Out port One modular modem (RJ-11) connector One LAN (RJ-45) port One IEEE 1394 port One stereo headphone/Optical Digital (SPDIF) jack.
(See Audio specifications) One mono microphone jack. (See Audio specifications) KEYBOARD Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key keyboards. Total number of keys: 82 Function keys: [F1] through [F12]
Feature extension key: [Fn]
Two Windows keys: one Start and one application key Key pitch: 17.5 mm Key stroke: 2 mm Built-in Touchpad pointing device with left and right buttons and scroll button. Built-in palm rest External Keyboard Support USB-compatible External Mouse Support USB-compatible POWER Batteries One standard 6-cell high-capacity Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 10.8V, 4800 mAh. (Approximate charge time: system off: 6.5 hours, system running: 17 hours) Optional second bay battery: 6-cell Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 10.8V, 2300 mAh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, 60W, supplying 16V DC, 3.75A, to the LifeBook notebook, Fujitsu Model FPCAC37AP, which includes an AC cable. Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) 88 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Overall Dimensions Approximately 10.28"(w) x 7.83"(d) x 1.26/1.428"(h)
(261mm x 199 mm x 32/36 mm) Weights Approximately 3.28 lbs (1.50 kg) with standard high capacity battery and DVD/CD-RW combo drive ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C) Non-operating: 13 to 140 F (10 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Non-operating; 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum POPULAR ACCESSORIES For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at:
us.fujitsu.com/computers or call 1-877-372-3473. Memory Upgrade 256 MB Double Data Rate (DDR) SDRAM
(micro DIMM) 512 MB Double Data Rate (DDR) SDRAM
(micro DIMM) Power Additional standard High Capacity Lithium ion battery Modular 2nd Lithium ion Battery Auto/Airline Adapter AC Adapter Battery Charger Flexible Bay Devices Modular DVD/CD-RW combo drive Modular Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular second Lithium ion battery Additional Accessories USB Optical Mouse Wireless Keyboard and Mouse Notebook Guardian Lock External Floppy Disk Drive Carrying Cases Diplomat Dual Carrying Case Director Moda Backpack P7010.book Page 89 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE Depending on your pre-installed operating system, your Fujitsu LifeBook notebook comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition there is file transfer software, virus protection software and Power Management software. LEARNING ABOUT YOUR APPLICATION SOFTWARE Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. Manuals Included with your notebook you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-installed software. Any manuals that are not included, are avail-
able online through the help system of the software. We recommend that you review these manuals for general information on the use of these applications. Adobe Acrobat Reader The Adobe Acrobat Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files from across all of the major computing platforms. Norton AntiVirus 2004 Your system is preinstalled with a free 90-day trial version of Symantecs Norton AntiVirus 2004. Norton AntiVirus is a program designed to protect your Life-
Book notebook from computer viruses. It assists in the protection of the data currently residing on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The 90-day trial version is activated upon your acceptance of soft-
ware license agreement. After 90 days, it will be neces-
sary to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus definitions.
(See your online help or manual for more information on how and when to run this program). Fujitsu HotKey Utility Utility for adjusting the brightness level on your Life-
Book. Quicken 2004 New User Edition Quicken 2004 New User Edition by Intuit is a personal money management program. It has features such as portfolio management, account registries, on-line banking and bill paying features. This application is for new users who are using Quicken software for the first time. Full version upgrade information is available on line. S p e c i f i c a t i o n s MS Works Microsoft Works is a suite of software containing the basic tools to write letters and reports, track family and friends with address books, manage home finances, and create a home inventory. Depending upon your system configuration, one of the following applications will be installed on your note-
book:
Microsoft Works 7.0 Microsoft Works 7.0 is a suite of software containing the basic tools to write letters and reports, track family and friends with address books, manage home finances, and create a home inventory. Microsoft Office SBE Microsoft Small Business Edition (SBE) is a suite of applications designed to help run a small business while increasing productivity. Among the programs included in Microsoft SBE are Microsoft Word, Excel, and Power-
Point. 89 P7010.book Page 90 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n E i g h t 90 P7010.book Page 91 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Regulatory Information NOTICE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-
tion against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a partic-
ular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
n Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. n Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. n Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. n Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. Notice to Users of the US Telephone Network This equipment (FMD MBH7MD33 Modem) complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules, and the requirements adopted by ACTA. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN) for this equipment; or a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this infor-
mation or number must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment is designed to be connected to the tele-
phone network or premises wiring using a standard jack type USOC RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. R e g u l a t o r y I n f o r m a t i o n The ringer equivalent number (REN) of this equipment is 0.0B as shown on the label. The REN is used to deter-
mine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local tele-
phone company. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isnt practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facili-
ties, equipment, operations or procedures that could effect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to main-
tain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please refer to the manual or contact Fujitsu Computer Systems Corporation, Customer Service. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. (Contact the state public utility commission, public service commis-
sion or corporation commission for information). If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this computer does not disable your alarm equip-
ment. If you have any questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date an time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such busi-
ness, other entity, or individual. 91 P7010.book Page 92 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k - S e c t i o n E i g h t DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network NOTICE: This equipment (Modem FMD MBH7MD33) meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equip-
ment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indi-
cating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment. Before connecting this equipment to a telephone line the user should ensure that it is permissible to connect this equipment to the local telecommunication facilities. The user should be aware that compliance with the certification standards does not prevent service degradation in some situations. Repairs to telecommunication equipment should be made by a Canadian authorized maintenance facility. Any repairs or alterations not expressly approved by Fujitsu or any equipment failures may give the telecom-
munication company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment from the telephone line. NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.0. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equiva-
lence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed five. For safety, users should ensure that the electrical ground of the power utility, the telephone lines and the metallic water pipes are connected together. Users should NOT attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appro-
priate electric inspection authority or elec-
trician. This may be particularly important in rural areas. 92 Avis Aux Utilisateurs Du Rseau Tlphonique Canadien AVIS: Le prsent matriel (FMD MBH7MD33 Modem) est conforme aux spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada applicables au matriel terminal. Cette confor-
mit est confirme par le numro denregistrement. Le sigle IC, plac devant le numro denregistrement, signifie que lenregistrement sest effectu conform-
ment une dclaration de conformit et indique que les spcifications techniques dIndustrie Canada ont t respectes. Il nimplique pas quIndustrie Canada a approuv le matriel. Avant de connecter cet quipement une ligne tlpho-
nique, lutilisateur doit vrifier sil est permis de connecter cet quipement aux installations de tlcom-
munications locales. Lutilisateur est averti que mme la conformit aux normes de certification ne peut dans certains cas empcher la dgradation du service. Les rparations de lquipement de tlcommunications doivent tre eVectues par un service de maintenance agr au Canada. Toute rparation ou modification, qui nest pas expressment approuve par Fujitsu, ou toute dfaillance de lquipement peut entraner la compagnie de tlcommunications exiger que lutilisateur dcon-
necte lquipement de la ligne tlphonique. AVIS: Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) du prsent matriel est de 0.0. LIES assign chaque dispositif terminal indique le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquiva-
lence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5. Pour assurer la scurit, les utilisateurs doivent vrifier que la prise de terre du ser-
vice dlectricit, les lignes tlphoniques et les conduites deau mtalliques sont con-
nectes ensemble. Les utilisateurs NE doivent PAS tenter dtablir ces connex-
ions eux-mmes, mais doivent contacter les services dinspection dinstallations lectriques appropris ou un lectricien. Ceci peut tre particulirement important en rgions rurales. P7010.book Page 93 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM 9 Glossary 93 P7010.book Page 94 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n N i n e 94 P7010.book Page 95 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LifeBook notebook. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface. An industry specification for the efficient handling of power consumption in mobile computers. ACPI determines how a computer's BIOS, operating system, and periph-
erals communicate with each other about power management. Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line. Technology for transporting high bit-rate services over ordinary phone lines. APM Advanced Power Management. Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an auto-
mobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LifeBook note-
book. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your LifeBook notebook when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your LifeBook notebook. G l o s s a r y Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. CardBus A faster, 32-bit version of the PC Card interface which offers performance similar to the 32-bit PCI architecture. CD-ROM Compact disc read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. CMS Code Morphing Software. Crusoe processor software architecture that results in longer battery life. For more information on CMS, click on the Technology link on the refer to the Transmeta web site at: www.trans-
meta.com. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. If the platter is very stiff it is a hard drive, if it is highly flexible it is a floppy disk, if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter it is commonly called a diskette. 95 P7010.book Page 96 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n N i n e Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data on the disk. Diskette A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter. DMA Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface. A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software compo-
nents, and peripherals. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of elec-
tricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example: the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. Extended Memory All memory more than the 640KB recognized by MS-DOS as system memory. FCC Federal Communication Commission. Floppy Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media which is highly flexible. GB Gigabyte. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your LifeBook notebook in electronic form. I/O Port The connector and associated control circuits for data entering and leaving your LifeBook notebook in elec-
tronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive which is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE 1394 The IEEE 1394 (also known as Firewire or iLink) standard allows you to connect devices that are compliant with IEEE standard 1394. This port is effec-
tively a very fast communications port. This architecture is very good for transferring large files, such as those from digital cameras. IRQ Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. LAN Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-
time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. MB Megabyte. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is very stiff. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your LifeBook notebook CPU. Hexadecimal A decimal notation for the value of a 4 bit binary number. (0-9, A, B, C, D, E, F) Example: 2F in hexadecimal = 00101111 in binary = 47 in decimal. MHz Megahertz. 96 P7010.book Page 97 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. G l o s s a r y Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of micro-
processor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. PCMCIA PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association is an organization that sets standards for add-in cards for personal computers. Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POP3 Post Office Protocol. Protocol that is used to retrieve email from a mail server. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your LifeBook notebook. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation can not continue, the operating system will not be loaded. Program An integrated set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. PS/2 A series of personal computers which established a number of standards for connecting external devices such as keyboards and monitors. RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your LifeBook notebook that holds binary information
(both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Restart See Reset. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your LifeBook note-
book, this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which infor-
mation is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way can not be changed by your LifeBook notebook and does not require power to maintain it. SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Shadow RAM A technique of copying data or applications stored in ROM (Read Only Memory) into RAM (Random Access Memory) for access during actual operation. RAM is much faster to access than ROM, however ROM contents are not lost when power is removed. Shadowing allows permanently stored information to be rapidly accessed. SPDIF Sony Philips Digital Interface. Technology that allows you to download digital audio data onto a MiniDisc recorder. 97 P7010.book Page 98 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k S e c t i o n N i n e SSID Service Set Identifier. Specifies which network you are joining. Some systems allow you to specify any SSID as an option so you can join any network. mice, modems, and scanners. USB 1.1 has a transfer speed of a maximum of 12Mb/s. USB 2.0 is much faster, transferring at up to 480Mb/s. USB 2.0 is backward-
compatible to work with USB 1.1 devices. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your LifeBook notebook this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Stroke (keyboard) The amount of travel of a key when it is pressed from resting to fully depressed. Suspend To make inoperative for a period of time. Your LifeBook notebook uses various suspension states to reduce power consumption and prolong the charge of your battery. SVGA Super VGA. Standard that provides 800x600 pixel resolution and a palette of 16M colors. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchro-
nizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TFT Thin Film Transistor. A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organiza-
tion that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. USB Universal Serial Bus. An external bus standard that allows for fast data transfer. A single USB port can be used to connect up to 127 peripheral devices, such as VGA Video Graphics Array. A video display standard which provides resolutions of 720 x 400. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is a protocol for increasing privacy over wireless LANs. The protocol works by encrypting data while being transmitted over radio waves. WFM Wired for Management is Intels broad-based initiative to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business computing without sacrificing power and flexibility. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) identifies that the product has passed the interoperability test, supplied by the WECA
(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guar-
antees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. For more information on the Wi-Fi standard, go to the WECA website at: www.wirelessethernet.com. Write Protect Prevent alteration of the binary state of all bits in a storage media. Example: all information on a device such as a floppy diskette; a block of space in a storage media such as a partition of a hard drive; a file or direc-
tory of floppy diskette or hard drive. XGA Extended graphics array. Standard that provides resolutions of 640x480 or 1024x764, supporting 64k colors. 98 P7010.book Page 99 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Appendix A Using the Fingerprint Sensor*
* Optional Device 99 P7010.book Page 100 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k A p p e n d i x 100 P7010.book Page 101 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Fingerprint Sensor Device INTRODUCING THE OPTIONAL FINGERPRINT SENSOR DEVICE Your system may have an optional fingerprint sensor device in the location at which other models have a scroll button. (Figure 1) Figure A-1 Fingerprint sensor Although the system may have a fingerprint sensor in place of a scroll button, the fingerprint sensor can be used for scrolling. Simply move your fingerprint over the sensor the same as you would use a scroll button. With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:
Log onto Windows Recover from suspend mode Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into homepages that require a username and pass-
word After you have enrolled - or registered - your finger-
print, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-
protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r GETTING STARTED This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. INSTALLING OMNIPASS If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 102. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:
The presence of the gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The presence of the Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Profes-
sional operating system At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 102. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. For installation, OmniPass requires that the user installing OmniPass have administrative privileges to the system. If your current user does not have administrative privileges, log out and then log in with an administrator user before proceeding with OmniPass installation. To install OmniPass on your system you must:
1. Insert the installation media for the OmniPass appli-
cation into the appropriate drive. If you are installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must find and launch the OmniPass installation program
(setup.exe) from the media. 2. Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass installation program. Specify a location to which you would like OmniPass installed. It is recom-
mended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root directory (e.g. C:\). 3. Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 101 P7010.book Page 102 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k A p p e n d i x The installation program automatically places an icon
(Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of creden-
tials that you have to remember. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. During OmniPass user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. To check the version information of OmniPass:
1. From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-
shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Click the Start button, select Settings, and click Control Panel (if you are using Windows XP you will see the Control Panel directly in the Start menu;
click it, then click Switch to Classic View). Double-
click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2. Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass Control Panel. The About tab window appears with version information about OmniPass. Uninstalling OmniPass For uninstallation, OmniPass requires that the user uninstalling OmniPass have administrative privileges to the system. If your current user does not have administrative privileges, log out and then log in with an administrator user before proceeding with OmniPass uninstallation. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:
1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings, and then Control Panel. 2. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 3. Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4. Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5. Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. USER ENROLLMENT Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing 102 Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system
(his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password lifebook), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John were to go to an Internet cafe to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and lifebook) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than where he enrolled that OmniPass user, he will not gain access. The enrollment procedure assumes you have no hardware authentication devices or alternate storage locations that you wish to integrate with OmniPass. If you desire such functionality, consult the appropriate sections of this document. Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified other-
wise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex;
click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. 1. Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2. Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This will become the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value P7010.book Page 103 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM will be your Windows computer name. In a corpo-
rate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. Refer to Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 103 for additional information. 3. 4. Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at least Prompt with system beeps only until you get accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next]
to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5. Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your system and streamline the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the authentication prompt to start device enrollment. 1. During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. 2. Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elon-
gated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button;
click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r 3. Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the finger-
print, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automati-
cally appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Veri-
fication Successful under the capture window. USING OMNIPASS You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regu-
larly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from standby or hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during pass-
word replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unse-
lected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the finger-
print capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or pass-
word protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. 103 P7010.book Page 104 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k A p p e n d i x Go to a site that requires a login (username and pass-
word), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],
[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click this OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but do not click the
[Login] or [Submit] button. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three effective settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. This setting is more convenient in that whenever you go to a site remembered with this setting, you will bypass any authentication procedure and gain instant access to the site. But should you leave your system unattended with your OmniPass user logged in, anyone using your system can browse to your password protected sites and gain automatic access. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master pass-
word or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. 104 Click Finish to complete the remember password proce-
dure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Pass-
word Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master pass-
word prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. If a machine is locked and OmniPass detects a different user logging back in with a fingerprint, the first user will be logged out and the second user logged in. In Windows XP, your login options must be set either for classic login, or for fast user switching and logon screen to be enabled to use your fingerprint to log on to Windows. To change this go to Control Panel, select User Accounts and then click Change the way users log on or off. If your Windows screensaver is password protected, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to screensaver password dialog during resume. You can authenticate to your screensaver pass-
word prompt with your enrolled finger. Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-
ment; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Pass-
words under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. P7010.book Page 105 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM You can view the credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Pass-
word Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is the resetting of your Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, then the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm your password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt(s) and click OK and your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Manage-
ment; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then click [Apply]. When you delete an identity, all of its associated remembered sites and password protected dialogs are lost. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply]
to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automati-
cally be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using "master password". U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your user-
name in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password:
field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-
down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity you wish to login as and then click OK to login. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Iden-
tity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing pass-
words for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 104. CONFIGURING OMNIPASS This section gives an overview of both the Export/
Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users Using the OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and any enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. You should periodically export your user profile and store it in a safe place. If anything happens to your system, you can import your OmniPass profile to a new system and have all your remem-
bered settings and fingerprints instantly. You don't forget the Windows login credentials when exporting. When you examine the importation, you are prompted for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. 105 P7010.book Page 106 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k A p p e n d i x Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authenti-
cation, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile You cannot import a user into OmniPass if there already is a user with the same name enrolled in OmniPass. To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass and then select OmniPass Import/Export File (*.opi) and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported (.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login cre-
dentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new sys-
tem. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sun-
shine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. 106 If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, pro-
vided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. OMNIPASS CONTROL CENTER This section will serve to explain functions within the OmniPass Control Center that werent explained earlier. You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of three ways:
Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-right cor-
ner of the desktop) Click the Start button; select the Programs group;
select the Softex program group; and click the OmniPass Control Center selection. Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-
click the Softex OmniPass icon. User Management The User Management tab has two major interfaces:
Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/
Export User functionality is documented in Exporting and Importing Users on page 105. Add/Remove User functionality is straightforward. If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment Wizard is documented in User Enrollment on page 102. If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user removal. Click OK to complete user removal. Removing a user will automatically destroy all OmniPass data associated with that user. All identities and credentials associated with the user will be lost. If you are sure about removing the user, we recommend you export the user profile. User Settings The User Settings tab has four interfaces: Audio Settings, Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow users to customize OmniPass to suit their individual prefer-
ences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips) you can set how OmniPass notifies the user of OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied, P7010.book Page 107 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM etc.). The details of each setting under the Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-explana-
tory. The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll finger-
prints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional finger-
prints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authen-
ticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it should already be marked by a green check if you have a finger enrolled) and click Next. System Settings The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found in the System Settings tab. With these options you can specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your Windows Logon. The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your Windows login credentials. If the user logging into Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is appropriate for an office setting or any setting where users must enter a username and password to log into a computer. This is the default setting. With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you have logged on to Windows. With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be logged on. You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User from the right-click menu. TROUBLESHOOTING You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local secu-
rity settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access:
Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authen-
ticate as Themselves. U s i n g t h e F i n g e r p r i n t S e n s o r Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the proce-
dure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank pass-
words to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied
(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:
Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 107 P7010.book Page 108 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k A p p e n d i x 108 P7010.book Page 109 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM Index A AC I n d e x D DC adapter . 23, 97 plug adapters . 81 output cable . 23 power jack . 8, 23 Anti-theft lock slot . 10 Device Ports . 44 Auto Insert Notification . 36 DIMM . 42 Auto/Airline Adapter . 23, 97 Disk care . 82 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . 78 B Battery . 31 alarm . 31 battery bay release button . 11 care . 82 charging indicator . 12 conserving power . 27 increasing life . 82 level indicators . 12 lithium ion battery . 31, 98 low . 31 recharging . 31 replacing . 32 shorted . 32 suspend mode . 31 swapping . 32 BIOS . 97 guide . 26 setup utility . 25 Boot . 97 sequence . 25 Display Panel . 7, 24 adjusting . 24 brightness . 24 closing . 24 opening . 24 Display Timeout . 28 Dolby Headphone . 35 Drivers and Application Restore CD . 77 DVD/CD-RW drive control panel . 35 loading . 34 removing . 35 software . 35 tray release . 76 using . 36 DVD-RAM . 34 E Error Messages . 75 Extended Memory . 98 External Floppy Disk Drive . 33 Built-in Microphone . 6 External Monitor Port . 9, 46 C Cache Memory . 97 Click Me! . 26 Cold-swap . 18 Compact Flash card slot . 8 eject button . 8 Configuration Label . 11 Contact Information . 1 Cursor control . 15 Cursor Keys . 14 F FDU . 78 Fingerprint Sensor Device . 103 enrolling a fingerprint . 105 getting started . 103 installing OmniPass . 103 logging into a remembered site . 106 OmniPass authentication toolbar . 105 password replacement . 105 remembering a password . 105 uninstalling OmniPass . 104 user enrollment . 104 using OmniPass . 105 Firewire . 9, 45 109 P7010.book Page 110 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k Flexible bay . 8, 18 cold-swapping . 18 hot-swapping . 19 installing . 18 release latch . 11 removing . 18 Floppy Disk ejecting . 33 formatting . 33 initializing . 33 loading . 33 preparing . 33 write protect . 33 Floppy Disk Drive care . 82 Fujitsu Driver Update utility . 78 Fujitsu HotKey Utility . 89 Fujitsu LifeBook care and maintenance . 81 traveling . 81 Function Key F10 . 14 F3 . 14 F4 . 14 F5 . 14 F6 . 14 F7 . 14 F8 . 14 F9 . 14 Fn . 14 H Hard Disk Timeout . 28 Hard Disk/CD Access Indicator . 12 Headphone Jack . 9, 45 Hibernation Feature . 27 disable/enable . 28 Hot-swapping . 19 I IEEE 1394 port . 9, 45 Indicators Caps Lock . 6 Num Lock . 6 Scroll Lock . 6 Integrated Wireless LAN . 47 Internal LAN port . 44 110 K Keyboard . 6, 13 cursor keys . 13 function keys . 13 key indicator lights . 13 numeric keypad . 13 Windows keys . 13 windows keys . 13 L LAN (RJ-45) port . 9 Lithium ion Battery . 11 M Memory capacity . 43 installing . 42 removing . 43 Memory Module Cover . 11 Memory Stick/SD Card . 6 installing . 40 removing . 41 slot . 6, 40 Memory Upgrade Module . 42 Microphone . 6 Microphone Jack . 9, 46 Modem . 8 port . 44 result codes . 76 Modular Devices . 18 installing . 18 removing . 18 N Numeric Keypad . 13 O Optical Digital audio connector . 46 audio-out jack . 9 Optical Drive . 34 care . 83 DVD/CD-RW combo . 34 emergency tray release . 36 software . 34 P7010.book Page 111 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM P PC Card care . 83 eject button . 8 installing . 37, 38 removing . 37, 39 slot . 8 Port Access Doors . 9 POST . 75, 99 error messages . 75 Power AC adapter . 23 auto/airline adapter . 23 management . 27 off . 28 sources . 23 Power Management . 27, 28 Power On . 25 Power On Self Test . 75 Pre-Installed Software . 89 Adobe Acrobat Reader . 89 Earthlink 5.0 . 89 manuals . 89 Netscape . 89 Norton AntiVirus 2004 . 89 Quicken New User Edition . 89 tutorials . 89 Pre-installed Software restoring . 77 PS/2 . 99 R Registration . 26 Regulatory Information . 91 Re-Installing Individual Drivers and Applications . 77 Restarting . 28 Restoring software . 77 Restoring the Factory Image . 77 RJ-11 . 8, 44 RJ-45 . 9, 44 S SD Card installing . 40 removing . 41 SDRAM . 42 Secure Digital Card I n d e x removing . 41 Serial Port . 99 Specifications . 87 audio . 87 device ports . 88 dimensions and weight . 88 environmental requirements . 88 features . 87 keyboard . 88 mass storage device options . 87 memory . 87 microprocessor . 87 MS Works . 89 popular accessories . 88 power . 88 video . 87 Status Indicator Panel . 7, 12 Stereo Speakers . 6 Suspend . 27, 100 Suspend/Resume/Power On Button . 7, 27 S-Video Out Port . 9, 45 Swapping batteries . 32 System Specifications . 87 T Touchpad . 15 buttons . 15 clicking . 15 controls . 16 double-clicking . 15 dragging . 16 pointing device . 6 scroll button . 6 scrolling . 16 Troubleshooting . 67 battery . 71 built-in speakers . 68 CD-ROM . 68 display panel . 73 DVD/CD-RW drive . 68 hard disk drive . 69 identifying the problem . 67 keyboard . 69 memory . 70 modem . 70 mouse . 69 PC card . 70 power . 71, 72 USB . 70 Troubleshooting Table . 68 111 P7010.book Page 112 Monday, December 20, 2004 1:57 PM L i f e B o o k P 7 0 0 0 N o t e b o o k U Universal Serial Bus Ports . 9, 45 V Volume Control . 17 W Warranty . 1 Windows keys . 13 application key . 13 start keys . 13 Wireless LAN access point (infrastructure) mode . 51 activating the WLAN device . 52 ad hoc mode . 50 before using the wireless LAN . 50 configuration . 53 deactivating the WLAN device . 51 devices covered by this document . 50 IP address information . 63 modes . 50 on/off switch . 6 specifications . 64 troubleshooting . 60 using Atheros Client Utility software . 55 using Intel PROSet software . 54 using Wireless Zero Configuration Tool . 53 wireless LAN glossary . 61 wireless network considerations . 51 112
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2005-07-27 | 5180 ~ 5320 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
2 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2005-07-27
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Fujitsu Client Computing Limited (FCCL)
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0009379173
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1-1, Kamikodanaka 4-chome
|
||||
1 2 |
Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki, N/A 211-8588
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
EJE
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
WL0033
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
M**** U********
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Engineer
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+81-4********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+81-4********
|
||||
1 2 |
u******@jp.fujitsu.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
UL Apex Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
M******** I****
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
4383-326 Asama-cho
|
||||
1 2 |
Ise-shi, Mie-ken, 516-0021
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
M******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
UL Apex Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
K**** K********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
4383-326 Asama-cho
|
||||
1 2 |
Ise-shi, Mie-ken, 516-0021
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
K******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | LifeBook P Series w/WM3B2915ABG 11ABG WLAN | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power is conducted. Device is restricted to indoor use only for 5.15-5.25 GHz. Use in portable RF exposure conditions is limited to the specific product and antenna configurations evaluated in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device. End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. Highest reported body SAR values per band for this FCC ID are: 2.4 GHz 0.18 W/kg; 5.3 GHz 1.35 W/kg; 5.8 GHz 0.79 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
UL Japan, Inc. Yokowa EMC Lab.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
T****** H********
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+81-5********
|
||||
1 2 |
T******@jp.ul.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 5180.00000000 | 5320.00000000 | 0.0386000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.105 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15C | 5745 | 5825 | 0.1014 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC